summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900
committerNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2019-09-02 13:46:59 +0900
commite0c6872cf40896c7be36b11dcc744620f10adf1d (patch)
tree60335e10d2f4354b0674ec22d7b53f0f8abee672 /macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw
Initial commit
Diffstat (limited to 'macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw')
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/CHANGES768
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/LIESMICH168
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/README161
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-preamble.tex239
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-print.tex66
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-screen.tex75
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw.pdfbin0 -> 156882 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw.tex1364
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/de-biblatex-dw.pdfbin0 -> 172592 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/de-biblatex-dw.tex1506
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-authortitle-dw.pdfbin0 -> 351005 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-authortitle-dw.tex174
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-examples-dw.bib851
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-footnote-dw.pdfbin0 -> 357012 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-footnote-dw.tex172
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-authortitle-dw.pdfbin0 -> 320826 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-authortitle-dw.tex169
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-footnote-dw.pdfbin0 -> 327161 bytes
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-footnote-dw.tex171
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/examples-dw.bib840
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/authortitle-dw.bbx914
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/footnote-dw.bbx7
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/standard-dw.bbx1884
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/authortitle-dw.cbx403
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/footnote-dw.cbx324
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/standard-dw.cbx473
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/lbx/english-dw.lbx34
-rw-r--r--macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/lbx/german-dw.lbx128
28 files changed, 10891 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/CHANGES b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/CHANGES
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..73a77cc950
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/CHANGES
@@ -0,0 +1,768 @@
+biblatex-dw 2016/12/06 v1.7
+Copyright (c) 2008-2016 Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>
+
+ Version history
+ ---------------
+
+v1.7 [2016/12/06]
+This version of biblatex-dw needs at least biblatex 3.3 and was testet with
+biblatex 3.6 and biber 2.6.
+- New option "citeauthorname" (instead of "firstfullname") which can take the
+ values "normal" (\citeauthor and \textcite print the surname only, as in
+ standard biblatex), "firstfull" (at the first use of \citeauthor or \textcite,
+ the full name is printed, otherwise the surname only; thus, this is the
+ behaviour of the former option "firstfullname") and "full" (the full name is
+ always printed when using \citeauthor or \textcite). The default for this option
+ is "normal".
+- Option "firstfullname" has been dropped (see above, option "citeauthorname").
+- Option "series" can now take the values "standard", "afteryear" and
+ "beforeedition". The latter is new and prints the series ahead of the edition.
+ The default for this option is "standard".
+- BUGFIX: From version 3.3 of biblatex, \DeclareNameFormat has changed. This
+ version of biblatex-dw is now compatible with the new syntax.
+- BUGFIX: In some circumstances, the option "inreference=full" was broken. This
+ should be fixed now.
+- BUGFIX: In some cases, @review in combination with the xref functionality
+ suppressed the output of pages. This should be fixed.
+- Compatibility with biblatex 2.9 regarding the list of shorthands.
+
+v1.6a [2013/09/22]
+This version of biblatex-dw was tested with biblatex 2.7a and biber 1.7.
+ - New option "inreference" (authortitle-dw only) which can take the values
+ "normal" and "full": If set to "full", @inreference entries are printed always
+ in full, but are omitted from the bibliography. Note that when using
+ "xref=false", you have to cite the corresponding @reference entry manually
+ (e.g. with \nocite) if you wish to see the @reference entry in the
+ bibliography. The "inreference" option complies with both ibidtracker and
+ idemtracker. The default for this option is "normal".
+ - BUGFIX: With the option "addyear" a superfluous space was introduced in some
+ circumstances. This should be fixed now.
+
+v1.6 [2013/09/07]
+This version of biblatex-dw was tested with biblatex 2.7a and biber 1.7.
+ - New option "addyear" (authortitle-dw only): If set to "true", the year of the
+ publication will be added after the title in citations. The year appears in
+ parentheses. The default for this option is "false".
+ - BUGFIX: If a title ended with a question mark or an exclamation mark, the
+ "seenote" string in footnote-dw was capitalised. This has been fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: There was a problem with @inbook entries in the bibliography when
+ using xref=true (the author of the book entry was not always shown). This is
+ now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: Using annotation=true and/or library=true lead to a superfluous
+ linebreak and dot in those entries which held an annotation and/or library.
+
+v1.5 [2012/06/28]
+This version of biblatex-dw was tested with biblatex 1.7.
+ - BUGFIX: The functionality of ibidpage=true was broken. This is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: With edbyidem=true (and xref=false), the first citation of an
+ @inbook entry where author and editor are the same, but the bookauthor
+ differs resulted in "ed. by idem", which is wrong. This is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: With edbyidem=false, the book author of @inbook entries
+ was not typeset in the appropriate format. This could lead to a
+ wrong output (e.g. "Lastname, Firstname" instead of "Firstname
+ Lastname"). This is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: With @inreference entries, the output could be
+ inconsistent with regard to the volume(s). This is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: Changes in font size for \annotationfont and \libraryfont
+ led to a wrong baselineskip. This is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: There was a small bug in @collection entries concerning the
+ punctuation after the labelname. This should be fixed now.
+ - BUGFIX: With shorthandinbib=true the \labelnamepunct was printed when there
+ was no author or editor present. This lead to superfluous punctuation and is
+ now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: In some circumstances the final period of the bibliography items
+ (\finentry) was not printed. This is now fixed.
+ - In authortitle-dw, the \textcite command now also considers
+ the value of the firstfull option. That means, if a work
+ is cited for the first time via a \textcite command, the
+ result would be "<Name> (<full citation>)".
+ - New option "citeauthor" which can take the values "namefont", "namefontfoot"
+ and "normalfont". This option controls the name format for the \citeauthor
+ command. With "citeauthor=namefont" the same format as set by the option
+ "namefont" is used. This is the default behaviour. With "citeauthor=normalfont"
+ the normal font is always used for \citeauthor, regardless of the "namefont"
+ option. With "citeauthor=namefontfoot" the "namefont" format is used if the
+ \citeauthor command is inside a footnote, otherwise the normal font is used.
+ - The list of shorthands with option terselos=true is now even more terse:
+ the [main]subtitle and [main]titleaddon fields are now also omitted.
+
+v1.4 [2011/11/20]
+This version of biblatex-dw was tested with biblatex 1.7 and
+requires at least version 1.6 of biblatex.
+ - BUGFIX: With @review entries cited by \fullcite or
+ \footfullcite the reviewed work was not printed in full.
+ This is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: With "shorthandinbib=true" and "terselos=false",
+ the shorthand was printed twice in the list of
+ shorthands. This is now fixed.
+ - The \smartcite commands introduced by biblatex 1.2 are
+ now supported.
+ - The \textcite and \textcites commands are now also supported
+ by footnote-dw.
+ - New command \textcitesdelim: delimiter between author names
+ when using \textcites. The default is:
+ \addspace\bibstring{and}\space
+ - New option "seriesformat" which can take the values
+ "standard" and "parens". If set to "parens", the series
+ of a book etc. will be printed in parentheses, otherwise
+ without (as is the biblatex standard behaviour). The
+ default value for this option is "parens" (as was the
+ behaviour in earlier biblatex-dw versions).
+ - New option "editorstringfont" which can take the values
+ "normal" and "namefont". With "normal", the normal font
+ is used, with "namefont", the setting for the option
+ "namefont" is also used for the editor string (and
+ translator string etc.). The default value for this
+ option is "normal".
+ - New option "editionstring": If set to "true", the
+ bibliography string "edition" will be added to the
+ "edition" field, even if it is not an integer. Thus,
+ you can type, e.g.,
+ edition = {2., aktualisierte}
+ in your bib file and you will get "2., aktualisierte
+ Aufl." (or, with option abbreviate=false: "2.,
+ aktualisierte Auflage"). "editionstring=false" will give
+ biblatex’s default behaviour. The default for this option
+ is "false".
+ - New entry option "oldbookauthor" which is equivalent to
+ "oldauthor" but for the bookauthor (this is useful for
+ @inbook entries representing, e.g., an introduction to an
+ edition of a work by an author that should not be typeset
+ in the usual font for last names). This option can be set
+ on a per entry basis and can be disabled with the global
+ option "oldauthor=false".
+ - Improved options "namefont", "firstnamefont", "idemfont"
+ and "ibidemfont" which are now aware of the setting of
+ the biblatex option "punctfont".
+ - Small bugfix for the xref functionality.
+
+v1.3c [2011/02/06]
+This version of biblatex-dw needs biblatex 1.1a. Please note
+that you have to update biblatex as well if you would like
+to use biblatex-dw 1.3c!
+ - BUGFIX: Under some circumstances, an error occurred
+ (command \cbx@tempa could not be found). This should be
+ fixed now.
+ - BUGFIX: Some of the German translations were broken due
+ to a change of internal commands in biblatex. This is now
+ fixed.
+ - The entry type @review is now supported. You can
+ specify a reviewed work via the xref field. See the
+ documentation for details.
+ - Some internal changes concerning \DeclareFieldFormat
+ directives.
+
+v1.3b [2010/11/21]
+This version of biblatex-dw was tested against biblatex 1.0,
+but it should also work with versions from biblatex 0.9d.
+The following changes were made to biblatex-dw:
+ - BUGFIX: Using pagetotal=false and citepages=separate, the
+ herename was printed as soon as the pagetotal field was
+ present (although the pagetotal field itself was not
+ printed). This is now fixed, and the citepages option
+ pays attention to the pagetotal option.
+ - In order to match as closely as possible to biblatex
+ itself, the \citenamepunct command was renamed to
+ \nametitledelim. For compatibility reasons with earlier
+ versions of biblatex-dw, the \citenamepunct was kept.
+ Thus, it does not matter if you redefine \nametitledelim
+ or \citenamepunct, the effect will be the same; but note
+ that the \citenamepunct may be dropped in later versions
+ of biblatex-dw.
+ - In full citations \nametitledelim is used instead of
+ \labelnamepunct.
+ - Improvements regarding idem functionality in combination
+ with xref=true.
+ - Improved the documentation.
+
+v1.3a [2010/09/21]
+This version of biblatex-dw supports biblatex 0.9d. Please
+note that you have to update biblatex at least to version
+0.9b if you would like to use biblatex-dw 1.3a! You will
+also need to install the package logreq which is a new
+requirement since biblatex 0.9b. Users might also need to
+update their data due to some changes in biblatex 0.9a and
+biblatex 0.9b. Please follow the hints for users given in
+biblatex’s RELEASE notes for both of these versions.
+The following changes were made to biblatex-dw:
+ - Option "omitpages" was renamed to "citepages" and
+ enhanced. As in the verbose standard styles, you can now
+ choose between "permit", "omit", "suppress" and
+ "separate". Other as in the biblatex styles, the standard
+ for this option in biblatex-dw is "separate".
+ - Option "herename" dropped. The same functionality can now
+ be achieved by using "citepages=separate". Note that the
+ bibliography string "herename" was also dropped,
+ "thiscite" is used instead.
+ - New option "shorthandinbib": if set to "true", the
+ shorthand of each entry will be typeset in the
+ bibliography before each item. The shorthand will be set
+ in brackets, separated by a space. You can customize this
+ behaviour by adjusting the following commands:
+ \DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandinbib}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
+ \newcommand*{\shorthandinbibpunct}{\addspace}
+ The default for "shorthandinbib" is "false".
+ - BUGFIX: The shorthandpunct could not be redefined by a
+ simple \renewcommand, but only as an argument of
+ \AtBeginDocument. This is now fixed, and a simple
+ \renewcommand is sufficient.
+ - BUGFIX: The shorthandpunct was also printed, when the
+ option "shorthandwidth" was not in use (this had only
+ effect, when the shorthandpunct was redefined). This is
+ now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: When using authortitle-dw with "firstfull=true",
+ a \parencite had an erroneous space for the first
+ citation without a postnote. This is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: The new editorial roles introduced in biblatex
+ 0.9 were not fully supported. This is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: The option "firstfullname" did not work with
+ biblatex’s option "uniquename". This is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: When using hyperref, some links to the
+ bibliography were broken. This should now be fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: In @inbook entries the punctuation after a book
+ author was not the \labelnamepunct. This is now fixed.
+
+v1.3 [2010/03/11]
+
+This version of biblatex-dw supports biblatex 0.9. Please
+note that you have to update biblatex as well if you would
+like to use biblatex-dw 1.3! Users might need to update
+their data due to some changes in biblatex, especially
+concerned with date specifications. Please follow the hints
+for users given in biblatex’s RELEASE notes.
+
+Further changes in this release:
+ - The options "isrn" and "issn" were dropped. Their
+ functionality can be achieved by the biblatex option
+ "isbn".
+ - BUGFIX: When using "idembibformat=dash", the @inreference
+ entries had a wrong punctuation inside the title. This is
+ now fixed.
+ - Option "pseudoauthor" changed: if set to true (and the
+ entry option "pseudoauthor" is used), the author of this
+ entry is printed. The new commands \bibleftpseudo and
+ \bibrightpseudo are used to enclose the author. These
+ commands are empty by default. If the global option
+ "pseudoauthor" is set to "false", the author of entries
+ with the entry option "pseudoauthor" are not printed at
+ all. The default value for the global option is "true"
+ (i.e. the behaviour is the same regardless of the entry
+ option "pseudoauthor").
+ - New command \locationdatepunct for the punctuation
+ between location and year/date. The default is \addspace.
+ - New command \locationpublisherpunct for the punctuation
+ between location and publisher. The default is
+ \addcolon\space.
+ - New command \publisherdatepunct for the punctuation
+ between publisher and year/date. The default is
+ \addcomma\space.
+
+v1.2o [2010/02/14]
+ - BUGFIX: When using the options "xref=true" and
+ "useeditor=false", the editor was not printed in the
+ bibliography. This is now fixed. Also, some bugs
+ regarding the xref functionality in citations could be
+ fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: The editors in @incollection, @inproceedings and
+ @inreference entries were printed using the name format
+ "sortname" ("Lastname, Firstname") where it should have
+ been the name format "byeditor" ("Firstname Lastname").
+ This is now fixed.
+ - New option "omiteditor": If one uses "useeditor=false"
+ and "omiteditor=true", the editor in citations will be
+ omitted. The same applies to the xref functionality in
+ the bibliography. With "useeditor=true", this option has
+ no effect. The standard for this option is "false".
+ - The limitation regarding the combination of "xref=true",
+ "edbyidem=true" and "useeditor=false" is no longer valid.
+ That means, it is not necessary to have the editor in the
+ child entry as well in order to get an "idem" string.
+ - Extended the documentation.
+
+v1.2n [2010/01/24]
+ - The option "edbeforetitle" was discarded. The same
+ functionality can be obtained by the option "useeditor".
+ In this context, some bugs could be resolved.
+ - New option "omitpages": if set to "true", the page range
+ of @article, @inbook, @incollection or @inproceedings
+ entries will be suppressed in full citations.
+ The standard value is "false".
+ - Extended the documentation regarding the xref
+ functionality.
+
+v1.2m [2010/01/18]
+ - BUGFIX: Changed the default of \citerevsdnamedelim which
+ used to be a \slash. Now it is empty, because otherwise
+ it produced two slashes in some circumstances.
+ - BUGFIX: In footnote-dw with "xref=true", the reference to
+ the first entry did not work if the first citation of a
+ parent was cited via a child. This is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: In footnote-dw the punctuation of @collection
+ entries was wrong when using a prenote in conjunction
+ with "useeditor=false" or when there was no editor. This
+ is now fixed.
+ - The biblatex option "singletitle" can now be used both
+ with authortitle-dw and footnote-dw. Using this option, a
+ work"s title is only printed if there is not more than
+ one work by the author or editor.
+ - New entry option "pseudoauthor". If set to true, the
+ author is put in brackets. This is useful for e.g.
+ editions of works whose authors are not named, but are
+ known. See the documentation for details. The entry
+ option does only have effect if the global option
+ "pseudoauthor" is set to "true". The default value is
+ "false".
+
+v1.2l [2009/10/19]
+ - BUGFIX: With footnote-dw, the references to the first
+ citations did not work, when refsections were used. This
+ is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: With xref=true, when no volume was present in an
+ @inreference entry as well as in its corresponding
+ @reference entry, the bibstring "vol." was printed. This
+ is now fixed.
+ - New option "shortjournal". If set to "true", the field
+ "shortjournal" is used instead of "journaltitle". This is
+ useful for journal abbreviations. The default is "false".
+ - New option "acronyms". If set to "true", shorthands (and
+ with "shortjournal=true" also the abbreviated journal
+ titles) are set with the command \mkbibacro, but only if
+ the entry option "acronym" is set to "true". The default
+ is "false".
+ - New option "pageref" (in footnote-dw only). If set to
+ "true", it adds the page to the footnote number pointing
+ to the full citation if it is located on a different
+ page. This option is the same as in the standard styles
+ "verbose-note" and "verbose-inote". The default is false.
+ - In footnote-dw, the pointer to the earlier citation is
+ suppressed if a shorthand exists and the option "citedas"
+ is true. Note that you can override the global option
+ "citedas" by setting the entry option "citedas".
+
+v1.2k [2009/08/22]
+ Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8e. Note that from this
+ version on biblatex 0.8e is required, so you have to update
+ biblatex as well if you would like to use biblatex-dw 1.2k!
+ - Compound abbreviations (introduced in biblatex-dw 1.2i)
+ are now separated by the new biblatex command
+ "\addabthinspace"; this affects only the German
+ localization in strings like "hg. v."
+ - The improved concatenation of roles is used. See
+ biblatex’s release notes for details.
+ - The new auxiliary macros for ordinals are used. See
+ biblatex’s release notes for details.
+ BUGFIXES
+ - BUGFIX: The option "ibidpage" did not work with
+ footnote-dw. This is now fixed.
+ Changed Entry Types
+ - @inreference
+ Up to now, this entry type was an alias for
+ @incollection. From now on, this entry type can be used
+ for articles in encyclopedias or dictionaries. For
+ details on how @inreference entries differ from @
+ incollection entries, please consult the documentation.
+ The @reference type remains an alias for @collection.
+ New Options
+ - "isrn" and "pagetotal"
+ These options can take the values "true" and "false".
+ With these options you can decide whether you want to
+ have printed the corresponding fields or not.
+ The default for these options is "false".
+ - "edstringincitations"
+ If set to "true", the editor and translator strings are
+ shown in the citations (not only in the full citations).
+ The default is "true".
+ - "series=standard|afteryear"
+ If set to "afteryear", the series is printed after the
+ year. This affects the entry types @book, @inbook,
+ @collection, @incollection, @proceedings, @inproceedings
+ and @manual.
+ New Commands
+ - "seriespunct"
+ punctuation before the series (of a book etc.). This
+ punctuation is set inside the parentheses. You can set it
+ e.g. to "=\addspace" which is common in some fields. The
+ default is empty, i.e. the series is printed right after
+ the opening round bracket.
+ - "sernumstring"
+ punctuation between series (of a book etc.) and number.
+ The default is "\addspace". You can easily redefine it,
+ e.g.:
+ \renewcommand*{\sernumstring}{%
+ \addcomma\space\bibstring{volume}\addspace}
+ This would give "(Name of Series, vol. N)".
+ - "herenamepunct"
+ If the "herename" is used, the punctuation before the
+ herename is determined by "herenamepunct". The default is
+ \addcomma\space.
+ Localization Changes
+ - In German localization, the strings "withcommentator",
+ "withannotator" and "withintroduction" are shortened as
+ follows:
+ -> withcommentator: komm. v.
+ -> withannotator: erläut. v.
+ -> withintroduction: eingel. v.
+ The long versions stay the same as in standard biblatex.
+
+v1.2j [2009/08/16]
+ - This is just a bugfix release. The only files changed are
+ footnote-dw.cbx, CHANGES, README and LIESMICH.
+ - BUGFIX: Since biblatex version 0.8e, footnote-dw gave an
+ error (Undefined control sequence: \blx@addperiod). This
+ is now fixed; thus, biblatex-dw (or rather footnote-dw)
+ should work with the biblatex versions 0.8e, 0.8f, 0.8g
+ and 0.8h, but it will not work with earlier versions.
+
+v1.2i [2009/05/10]
+ - BUGFIX: When using option "usetranslator=true", the
+ translator string was not aware of the option
+ "editorstring". This is now fixed.
+ - Improved bibmacro "journal+issuetitle" which is now aware
+ of the option "edbeforetitle".
+ - The "typeeditor" field is now supported. It can take the
+ values "editor" and "compiler". This field determines the
+ editor string after the name of the editor(s). The
+ abbreviated forms are "ed." for "editor" and "comp." for
+ "compiler". In German, both strings are the same
+ ("Herausgeber" or "Hrsg.").
+ - In English, the "idem" string is now declined (idem,
+ eadem, idem in singular; eidem, eaedem, eadem in plural)
+ and no longer abbreviated, even if abbreviate=true is
+ used.
+ - Improved the handling of "origfields=true".
+ - In German, the string "reprint" (Nachdruck) is now
+ abbreviated as "Ndr.", not as "Nachdr."
+ - Compound abbreviations are now separated by a thin space
+ rather than a normal one. At the moment, this affects
+ only the German localization in strings like "hg. v."
+
+v1.2h [2009/03/29]
+ - BUGFIX: The "idem" functionality is now also aware of
+ page breaks. If the citation is the first on a page (or
+ double page in twoside mode), the "idem" is suppressed.
+ If you don’t want this behaviour, you can set the option
+ "pagetracker=false".
+
+v1.2g [2009/03/20]
+ - Option "journalnumber" replaces "journumafteryear". The
+ option was enhanced and can now take the values
+ "standard", "afteryear" and "date". The value "standard"
+ is the same as the old journumafteryear=false,
+ "afteryear" is the same as the old journumafteryear=true.
+ The new value "date" assures that the date is printed,
+ even if the field issue is given (this is not the case in
+ the standard styles). Additionally, "journalnumber=date"
+ prints the number before the date, if the date (at least
+ year and month) is given, but it prints the number after
+ the year, if only the year is given (i.e. if the date is
+ not further specified). See the documentation for
+ details. The default is "journalnumber=standard".
+ - Improved german-dw.lbx.
+ - Adjusted the documentation for screen reading. A printer
+ friendly version can still be compiled from the source.
+
+v1.2f [2009/02/15]
+ - Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8c. Note that from
+ this version on biblatex 0.8c is required, so you have to
+ update biblatex as well if you would like to use
+ biblatex-dw 1.2f!
+ -> The biblatex-dw option "idem" was replaced by the new
+ biblatex option "idemtracker". The standard setting is
+ "idemtracker=constrict". If you would like to switch
+ off the idem functionality, you can use
+ "idemtracker=false". For more information on the
+ "idemtracker" option see the biblatex manual.
+ - New options "doi", "eprint", "isbn" and "issn" which can
+ take the values "true" and "false". With these options
+ you can decide whether you want to have printed the
+ corresponding fields or not. The default for these
+ options is "false" (as was the standard before).
+ - New option "idemfont" which can take the values
+ "smallcaps", "italic", "bold" and "normal". The default
+ is none which means that the "idem" string is printed in
+ the font shape of "namefont".
+ - New option "ibidemfont" which can take the values
+ "smallcaps", "italic" and "bold". The default is none
+ which means that the "ibidem" string is printed in normal
+ font shape.
+ - New macro "jourvolstring" which introduces the volume of
+ an article entry. The default is a space (as it was the
+ case before), but you can adjust it to your needs, e.g.:
+ \renewcommand*{\jourvolstring}{\addspace vol\adddot\space}
+ - New macro "journumstring" which introduces the number in
+ article entries, if the option "journumafteryear" is set
+ to "true". The default for this macro is a comma,
+ followed by the bibstring "number" and a non-breakable
+ space. You can redefine it to your needs, e.g.:
+ \renewcommand*{\journumstring}{\addspace}
+ - If there is no volume in an article entry, but the month
+ field is set, the date is separated from the journal
+ title by a comma and a space, not only a space.
+ - Fixed some BUGS concerning the xref functionality.
+ - Reorganized some bibliography drivers.
+ - Enhanced the documentation.
+
+v1.2e [2008/12/19]
+ - Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8b. Note that from
+ this version on biblatex 0.8b is required, so you have to
+ update biblatex as well if you would like to use
+ biblatex-dw 1.2e!
+ -> The new biblatex option "usetranslator" is supported.
+ - BUGFIX: The option "firstfullname" introduced in version
+ 1.2d had a bug which is now fixed.
+ - BUGFIX: The "idem" functionality did not work with the
+ multicite commands. This is now fixed.
+ - New option "journumafteryear": If set to "true", the
+ "number" in article entries is printed after the year and
+ introduced by the bibstring "number". If set to "false",
+ the default behaviour is used, i.e. "Journaltitle
+ volume.number (year)". The default is "true".
+ -> If "journumafteryear" is set "false", the separator
+ between volume and number in @article entries is now
+ configurable with the new command "\jourvolnumsep".
+ The default is a dot (which is also the default in
+ biblatex).
+ - When the "volume" is missing, the parenthesis around the
+ year in @article entries is omitted.
+ - The multicite command \cites is now also always printed
+ as footnote in "footnote-dw".
+ - Some changes in the internal code.
+ - Extended the documentation and examples.
+
+v1.2d [2008/12/07]
+ - BUGFIX: In footnote-dw, the punctuation after the author/
+ editor in all citations but the first one was always a
+ comma and not configurable by \citenamepunct. This is now
+ fixed.
+ - New option "firstfullname": when set to "true", the
+ commands \citeauthor and \textcite (with footnote-dw:
+ \citeauthor only) give the full name of authors/editors
+ when they have not been cited before, not only the last
+ name. The default is "false".
+ - Support for biblatex version 0.8a including
+ \MakeSentenceCase.
+ - Added lbx files with alternative strings for German and
+ additional strings for both German and English (these
+ strings were already included, but are now stored in the
+ language mapping files).
+
+v1.2c [2008/11/15]
+ - New option "idembibformat": When using "idembib=true",
+ you can choose whether you want to have an "idem" string
+ in the bibliography (idembibformat=idem) or a dash
+ (idembibformat=dash), as is the standard setting in
+ biblatex. The standard is "idembibformat=idem".
+ - Option "idembib" changed: Now "false" means that
+ subsequent entries of the same author are given with full
+ names, not a dash (as was the behaviour up to now). The
+ standard is "idembib=true".
+ - Improved xref support: The child entry does not only scan
+ for the "volume" field of the parent entry, but prints
+ also "location" and "year", if they differ from the
+ parent entry.
+
+v1.2b [2008/11/09]
+ - BUGFIX: With "xref=true", the first (full) citation did
+ not show the overall pages of @INBOOK, @INCOLLECTION and
+ @INPROCEEDINGS entries. This is now fixed.
+ - New option "nolocation". If set to "true", the location
+ and the publisher are omitted (even if you set
+ "nopublisher=false"). The default is "false", i.e. the
+ location is printed.
+ - The option "shorthandibid" can now also be used on a
+ per-entry basis.
+ - Improved xref support: If the "volume" field of a child
+ entry is set and the "volume" field of the corresponding
+ parent entry is not set, the volume of the child entry
+ will be printed immediately before the pages.
+
+v1.2a [2008/10/19]
+ - Improved option "edsuper" which also outputs non-integer
+ editions (though not as superscript, but rather similar
+ to a note.)
+ - The field "origpublisher" (new in biblatex 0.8) is now
+ also supported.
+ - New option "origfields" which can take the values "true"
+ (standard) and "false". With this option, you can now
+ decide, whether you want to have the fields
+ "origlocation", "origpublisher" and "origyear" to be
+ printed or not.
+ -> New option "origfieldsformat=parens|brackets|punct".
+ The default is "punct" which means that the new
+ punctuation mark "\origfieldspunct" (default:
+ \addcomma\space) is used to introduce the reprint
+ phrase. If you choose "parens" or "brackets", the
+ reprint phrase is put in parentheses or brackets,
+ respectively, and the \origfieldspunct is ignored.
+ - New option "shorthandwidth". With this option you can set
+ the width of the label in the list of shorthands to any
+ length (e.g. "3em" or "40pt"). This is useful if you have
+ very long shorthands.
+ -> New punctuation command "\shorthandpunct" which is
+ only exerted when you use the option "shorthandwidth".
+ Then it is set to a colon. You can redefine this
+ punctuation command with \renewcommand.
+ -> New length "\shorthandsep" which is only exerted if
+ you use the option "shorthandwidth". The length
+ "\shorthandsep" defines the spacing after the label in
+ the list of shorthands.
+ - Improved package warnings.
+
+v1.2 [2008/10/09]
+ - Adjustments to biblatex version 0.8. Note that from
+ version 1.2 on, biblatex-dw needs at least biblatex 0.8,
+ so you have to update biblatex as well if you would like
+ to use biblatex-dw 1.2!
+ -> The new biblatex option "firstinits" is supported.
+ -> The new macro \bibpagespunct is also supported.
+ - Added option "xref" which can be set to "true" or
+ "false". If you want to use the crossref functionality
+ (introduced in biblatex-dw version 1.1f), you now have to
+ set "xref=true". See the documentation for details.
+ - As biblatex 0.8 has changed the handling of the field
+ "edition", the option "edsuper" had to be adjusted. See
+ the documentation of biblatex-dw for details.
+ - Updated the documentation.
+
+v1.1h [2008/09/24]
+ - BUGFIX: When using the options "edbeforetitle" and
+ "edbyidem", the idem funcionality did not work. This is
+ now fixed.
+ - Updated documentation (see especially, if you are using
+ the crossref functionality) and examples.
+
+v1.1g [2008/09/05]
+ - The biblatex package option "mincrossrefs" is set to "1"
+ (instead of "2"). The reason is that otherwise entries
+ that are using the crossref functionality introduced in
+ biblatex-dw version 1.1f could be incomplete.
+ - If both "volumes" and "volume" are present, "volumes" is
+ now set before "volume".
+
+v1.1f [2008/08/10]
+ - BUGFIX: Corrected wrong punctuation when using "idembib=
+ false" in conjunction with an editor.
+ - Added crossref functionality (using biblatex’s field
+ "xref"). This works for authortitle-dw as well as
+ footnote-dw. For further information please have a look
+ into the package documentation.
+
+v1.1e [2008/06/13]
+ - BUGFIX: The option "edbeforetitle" caused a problem
+ when used together with the "idem" functionality
+ (which is the default). This is now fixed.
+ - Enhanced the "idem" functionality: If a citation with
+ shorthand precedes a citation of the same author or
+ editor without shorthand, the string "idem" is now
+ replaced by the author’s or editor’s name, since this
+ information cannot be gathered from the shorthand
+ citation and thus could mislead the reader.
+
+v1.1d [2008/06/05]
+ - BUGFIX: The global option "oldauthor" which was
+ introduced in version 1.1c caused an erroneous behaviour
+ when used together with "idembib=true" (which is the
+ default). This is now fixed.
+ - New option "editorstring" which can take the values
+ "parens", "brackets" and "normal"; the default is
+ "parens". This option sets the string "editor"
+ (abbreviated "ed.") in parentheses or in brackets, or
+ just puts the string (with a preceding comma) after the
+ editor name.
+ - New option "edbeforetitle" which can take the values
+ "true" and "false"; the default is "false". When set to
+ "true", the editor in @INCOLLECTION and @INPROCEEDINGS
+ entries will be typeset before the booktitle ("... in:
+ Editor (ed.): Booktitle ...") rather than afterwards
+ ("... in: Booktitle, ed. by Editor ...").
+ - Small correction in the terse version of the List of
+ Shorthands concerning the punctuation after authors/
+ editors.
+ - Added missing bibliography drivers for option "edbyidem".
+
+v1.1c [2008/05/29]
+ - BUGFIX: With the option "idem=false", the author of a
+ first citation who was cited immediately before with
+ another work lacked the forename.
+ - BUGFIX: The option "edbyidem=false" produced a
+ superfluous "ed. by" string.
+ - BUGFIX: Small punctuation issue with repeated citations
+ and "herename".
+ - New option "namefont" which can take the values
+ "smallcaps", "italic" and "bold". The default is none,
+ i.e. authors and editors are set in normal font shape.
+ With "useprefix=true", this option also affects the
+ name prefix.
+ - New option "firstnamefont" which can take the values
+ "smallcaps", "italic" and "bold". This also affects the
+ name prefix (with "useprefix=false") and the name
+ affix.
+ - The option "oldauthor" is now also available as global
+ option in order to disable the feature. If you set
+ "oldauthor=false" globally, every entry option
+ "oldauthor=true" is ignored. Thus, you can set the
+ fontname for every author with global options,
+ independent of entry options.
+
+v1.1b [2008/04/13]
+ - BUGFIX: When using \parencite with "footnote-dw",
+ additional parentheses (e.g. enclosing the string
+ "editor") were lost; they are now replaced by brackets.
+ - BUGFIX: In "footnote-dw", the normal \cite command
+ always produced a capital letter at the beginning. This
+ is fixed now.
+ - Fixed a small punctuation error in connection with
+ "herename".
+ - New command \titleaddonpunct for the punctuation before
+ titleaddon, booktitleaddon and maintitleaddon. The
+ default is a period now (not a comma, as before).
+
+v1.1a [2008/02/09]
+ - BUGFIX: When using the commands "mancite" or
+ "citereset", the "idem" functionality was not reset.
+ This is now fixed.
+ - New option "edsuper". If set to "true", the edition is
+ printed as superscript number (not as ordinal number)
+ straight ahead of the year. The default is "false".
+ - New option "firstfull" (only in "authortitle-dw"). If
+ set to "true", the first citation is a fullcite. The
+ default is "false".
+ - Option "citedas" is now also available for
+ "authortitle-dw" and used when "firstfull" is set to
+ "true".
+
+v1.1 [2008/02/01]
+ - BUGFIX: The "citedas" functionality did not work if the
+ first citation of an entry was introduced by "idem".
+ - New option "terselos" introduced for a terse version of
+ the list of shorthands (default is "true").
+ - New option "herename" introduced to specify if the term
+ \enquote{here} should prelude the pages of a fullcite
+ (or, with "footnote-dw", also the first citation of an
+ entry) which has a non-empty \texttt{pages}-field.
+ - New option "nopublisher" introduced to suppress the
+ publisher. The default value is "true", but if you want
+ to have the publisher printed, you now can set the
+ option "nopublisher=false".
+ - If the field "origlocation" is given, it will be set
+ together with "origyear", whereas "location" and "year"
+ are appended in parentheses, preluded by the bibstring
+ "reprint".
+ - The options "annotation" and "library" are now also
+ usable with the style "footnote-dw". The annotations
+ and library information are only printed in the
+ bibliography (if there is one), not in the citations or
+ in the list of shorthands.
+ - Updated documentation.
+
+v1.01 [2008/01/20]
+ - BUGFIX: The "pagetracker" functionality did not work
+ properly with the style "footnote-dw"
+ - Excluded ISBN/ISSN and DOI also from entry types
+ booklet, inproceedings, manual, misc, periodical,
+ proceedings, and report
+ - Punctuation corrections for the same entry types
+ concerning the series+number
+
+v1.0 [2008/01/14]
+ - Initial release
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/LIESMICH b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/LIESMICH
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..efe17b60f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/LIESMICH
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+biblatex-dw 2016/12/06 v1.7
+Copyright (c) 2008-2016 Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>
+
+************************************************************
+
+Inhalt der Datei LIESMICH
+ 1. Kurzbeschreibung
+ 2. Installationshinweise
+ 3. Benutzung
+ 4. Dokumentation
+ 5. Versionsgeschichte
+ 6. Danksagung
+ 7. Lizenz
+ 8. Dateien
+
+
+ 1. Kurzbeschreibung
+ -------------------
+
+ biblatex-dw ist eine kleine Sammlung von styles für das
+ Paket biblatex von Philipp Lehman. Sie ist gedacht zum
+ Zitieren im geisteswissenschaftlichen Bereich und bietet
+ dafür einige Funktionen, die über die Standardfunktionen
+ von biblatex hinausgehen. biblatex-dw baut vollständig auf
+ biblatex auf und kann nicht ohne biblatex benutzt werden!
+
+ Anregungen und Verbesserungsvorschläge sind jederzeit
+ willkommen. Wenn Sie einen Fehler finden, erstellen Sie
+ bitte einen Bug-Report (am besten inklusive Minimalbeispiel)
+ auf http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Bugs.
+ FÜr Verbesserungsvorschläge verwenden Sie ein Feature-Request unter
+ http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Features.
+
+
+ 2. Installationshinweise
+ ------------------------
+
+ biblatex-dw ist in den Distributionen MiKTeX und TeX Live
+ enthalten und kann mit deren Paketmanagern bequem
+ installiert werden. Wenn Sie stattdessen eine manuelle
+ Installation durchführen, so gehen Sie wie folgt vor:
+ Entpacken Sie die zip-Datei in den $LOCALTEXMF-Ordner ihres
+ Systems. Aktualisieren Sie anschließend die 'filename
+ database' ihrer TeX-Distribution. Für weitere Informationen
+ schauen Sie bitte in die Dokumentation Ihrer Distribution.
+
+
+ 3. Benutzung
+ ------------
+
+ Die hier angebotenen Zitierstile werden wie die Standard-
+ Stile beim Laden des Pakets biblatex eingebunden:
+
+ \usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex}
+ bzw.
+ \usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex}
+
+ Für zusätzliche Optionen, die von den Stilen bereitgestellt
+ werden, wird auf die Dokumentation von biblatex-dw sowie
+ auf die Beispiele 'de-authortitle-dw' und 'de-footnote-dw'
+ im Ordner 'examples' verwiesen.
+
+
+ 4. Dokumentation
+ ----------------
+
+ Die deutschsprachige Dokumentation von biblatex-dw findet
+ sich in der Datei 'de-biblatex-dw.pdf'. Diese Datei ist für
+ den Bildschirm optimiert. Eine Druckversion lässt sich aber
+ leicht aus der Datei 'de-biblatex-dw.tex' generieren, indem
+ man die Zeile
+ \input{biblatex-dw-screen}
+ auskommentiert (also das Kommentarzeichen % davorstellt)
+ und stattdessen die Zeile
+ \input{biblatex-dw-print}
+ nicht auskommentiert (also das Kommentarzeichen % vor
+ dieser Zeile löscht).
+ Achtung: Möglicherweise sind die Schriften nicht auf Ihrem
+ System vorhanden. Für die Dokumentation wurden folgende
+ Schriften verwendet:
+ * Linux Libertine als Brotschrift
+ * Linux Biolinum (Teil des Libertine-Pakets) für
+ Überschriften
+ * BeraMono als Festbreitenschrift
+ Diese Schriften sind frei verfügbar. Wenn Sie die Schriften
+ nicht installiert haben oder nicht installieren wollen,
+ verwenden Sie einfach andere Schriften. Die entsprechenden
+ Einstellungen finden Sie in der Datei
+ 'biblatex-dw-preamble.tex'.
+
+
+ 5. Versionsgeschichte
+ ---------------------
+
+ siehe Datei CHANGES
+
+
+ 6. Danksagung
+ -------------
+
+ Ohne biblatex gäbe es natürlich auch kein biblatex-dw,
+ deshalb gebührt mein Dank zuvorderst Philipp Lehman, auch
+ für die vielen Hilfestellungen und Hinweise, die er mir
+ immer wieder gegeben hat. Für Anregungen, Hinweise und
+ das Auffinden und Melden von Fehlern bedanke ich mich
+ außerdem bei folgenden Personen:
+ * Thomas Demmel * Simon Flossmann
+ * Till A. Heilmann * Dominic Kobelt
+ * Denis Maier * Rolf Niepraschk
+ * Philipp Pilhofer * Jan Hauke Rahm
+ * Ondrej Salvet * Johann Konrad Schwarz
+ * Salome Södergran * Jonas Stein
+ * Matthias Steinbrink * Philipp Stephani
+ * Bernhard Tempel * Herbert Voss
+ * Dominik Weber * Christian Weitert
+ * Christofer Zwanzig * Дмитрий Гордеев
+
+
+ 7. Lizenz
+ ---------
+
+ Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project
+ Public Lizenz, entweder Version 1.3 oder (nach Ihrer Wahl)
+ jede spaetere Version, verteilt und/oder verändert werden.
+ Die neueste Version dieser Lizenz finden Sie unter
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt. Version 1.3 (oder
+ eine neuere) ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX
+ Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter.
+
+ Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Betreuungs-Status 'maintained'
+ (betreut).
+
+ Der aktuelle Betreuer dieses Werkes ist Dominik Waßenhoven.
+
+
+ 8. Dateien
+ ----------
+
+ Dieses Werk (bzw. Paket) besteht aus folgenden Dateien:
+
+ * LIESMICH % diese Datei (inkl. Lizenz)
+ * README % diese Datei in englisch
+ * CHANGES % Versionsgeschichte (englisch)
+ * standard-dw.bbx
+ * standard-dw.cbx
+ * authortitle-dw.bbx
+ * authortitle-dw.cbx
+ * footnote-dw.bbx
+ * footnote-dw.cbx
+ * english-dw.lbx % Englische Sprachdatei
+ * german-dw.lbx % Deutsche Sprachdatei
+ * biblatex-dw.pdf % englische Dokumentation
+ * biblatex-dw.tex % englische Dokumentation
+ * biblatex-dw-preamble.tex % Präambel der Dokumentation
+ * biblatex-dw-print.tex % Einstellungen für Druckversion
+ * biblatex-dw-screen.tex % Einst. für Bildschirmversion
+ * de-biblatex-dw.pdf % deutsche Dokumentation
+ * de-biblatex-dw.tex % deutsche Dokumentation
+ * de-authortitle-dw.pdf % deutsches Beispiel
+ * de-authortitle-dw.tex % deutsches Beispiel
+ * de-footnote-dw.pdf % deutsches Beispiel
+ * de-footnote-dw.tex % deutsches Beispiel
+ * en-authortitle-dw.pdf
+ * en-authortitle-dw.tex
+ * en-footnote-dw.pdf
+ * en-footnote-dw.tex
+ * examples-dw.bib
+ * de-examples-dw.bib % bib-Datei für die Beispiele
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/README b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e0535eadd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/README
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+biblatex-dw 2016/12/06 v1.7
+Copyright (c) 2008-2016 Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>
+
+************************************************************
+
+Contents of README
+ 1. Package description
+ 2. Installation
+ 3. Usage notes
+ 4. Documentation
+ 5. History
+ 6. Acknowledgements
+ 7. Licence
+ 8. Files
+
+
+ 1. Package description
+ ----------------------
+
+ biblatex-dw is a small collection of styles for the
+ biblatex package. It was designed for citations in the
+ Humanities and offers some features that are not provided
+ by the standard biblatex styles. biblatex-dw is dependend
+ on biblatex and cannot be used without it!
+
+ Any suggestions concerning this package are highly
+ appreciated. If you should find an error, please file a
+ bug report at:
+ http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Bugs
+ If you think that a feature is missing, please file a feature
+ request at:
+ http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Features
+
+
+ 2. Installation
+ ---------------
+
+ biblatex-dw is part of the distributions MiKTeX and
+ TeX Live. Thus, you can easily install it using the
+ respective package manager. If you would like to install
+ biblatex-dw manually, do the following: Extract the tds.zip
+ archive to the $LOCALTEXMF directory of your system.
+ Refresh your filename database. For further information,
+ please see the documentation of your LaTeX distribution.
+
+
+ 3. Usage notes
+ --------------
+
+ The styles are loaded as the biblatex standard styles:
+
+ \usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex}
+ or
+ \usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex}
+
+ If you want to learn more about the styles and their
+ additional options, please consult the package
+ documentation as well as the examples 'en-authortitle-dw'
+ and 'en-footnote-dw' in the 'examples' folder.
+
+
+ 4. Documentation
+ ----------------
+
+ The English documentation of biblatex-dw can be found in
+ the file 'biblatex-dw.pdf'. This file is intended for
+ viewing on a computer screen. A printable version can be
+ compiled from the file 'biblatex-dw.tex'. You only have to
+ comment the line
+ \input{biblatex-dw-screen}
+ (i.e. put a % sign in front of it) and uncomment the line
+ \input{biblatex-dw-print}
+ (i.e. delete the % sign at the beginning of this line).
+ Note: The fonts may not be installed on your system. The
+ following fonts were used for the documentation:
+ * Linux Libertine in running text
+ * Linux Biolinum (part of the Libertine package) for
+ headings
+ * BeraMono as typewriter font
+ These fonts are freely available. If you do not have these
+ fonts installed in your system or do not want to install
+ them, you can easily use another font. The relevant
+ settings can be found in the file
+ 'biblatex-dw-preamble.tex'.
+
+
+ 5. History
+ ----------
+
+ see file CHANGES
+
+
+ 6. Acknowledgements
+ -------------------
+
+ First of all, I would like to thank Philipp Lehman not only
+ for his wonderful package 'biblatex', but also for his
+ helping hand and advice in creating these styles.
+ Furthermore, for numerous suggestions, contributions and
+ bug reports I would like to thank the following people:
+ * Thomas Demmel * Simon Flossmann
+ * Till A. Heilmann * Dominic Kobelt
+ * Denis Maier * Rolf Niepraschk
+ * Philipp Pilhofer * Jan Hauke Rahm
+ * Ondrej Salvet * Johann Konrad Schwarz
+ * Salome Södergran * Jonas Stein
+ * Matthias Steinbrink * Philipp Stephani
+ * Bernhard Tempel * Herbert Voss
+ * Dominik Weber * Christian Weitert
+ * Christofer Zwanzig * Дмитрий Гордеев
+
+
+ 7. Licence
+ ----------
+
+ This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+ conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+ version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+ version. The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt and version 1.3 or
+ later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+ 2005/12/01 or later.
+
+ This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+
+ The Current Maintainer of this work is Dominik Waßenhoven.
+
+
+ 8. Files
+ --------
+
+ This work consists of the following files:
+
+ * README % this file, including licence
+ * LIESMICH % the README in German
+ * CHANGES % version history
+ * standard-dw.bbx
+ * standard-dw.cbx
+ * authortitle-dw.bbx
+ * authortitle-dw.cbx
+ * footnote-dw.bbx
+ * footnote-dw.cbx
+ * english-dw.lbx % English language mapping file
+ * german-dw.lbx % German language mapping file
+ * biblatex-dw.pdf % English documentation
+ * biblatex-dw.tex % English documentation
+ * biblatex-dw-preamble.tex % Preamble for the documentation
+ * biblatex-dw-print.tex % Settings for printable version
+ * biblatex-dw-screen.tex % Settings for screen version
+ * de-biblatex-dw.pdf % German documentation
+ * de-biblatex-dw.tex % German documentation
+ * de-authortitle-dw.pdf
+ * de-authortitle-dw.tex
+ * de-footnote-dw.pdf
+ * de-footnote-dw.tex
+ * en-authortitle-dw.pdf % English example
+ * en-authortitle-dw.tex % English example
+ * en-footnote-dw.pdf % English example
+ * en-footnote-dw.tex % English example
+ * examples-dw.bib % bib for English examples
+ * de-examples-dw.bib
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-preamble.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-preamble.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..19bee12119
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-preamble.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,239 @@
+%!TEX encoding = UTF-8 Unicode
+
+% biblatex-dw
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2016
+%
+% This file is the preamble for the documentation of
+% biblatex-dw (both the English and the German version)
+
+%%%%% biblatex-dw Version %%%%% version of biblatex-dw %%%%%
+\newcommand{\biblatexdwversion}{1.7}
+\newcommand{\biblatexdwdate}{\printdate{2016-12-06}}
+\newcommand{\mindestanforderung}{3.3}% minimum biblatex version
+\newcommand{\testversion}{3.6}% tested biblatex version
+\newcommand{\biberversion}{2.6}% tested biber version
+\newcommand{\screenversion}{}
+\newcommand{\TOC}{}
+\newcommand{\lizenz}{}
+
+%%%%% Kodierung %%%%% Encoding %%%%%
+\usepackage{fontspec,xltxtra,xunicode}
+
+%%%%% Inhaltsverzeichnis %%%%% Table of Contents %%%%%
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
+
+%%%%% Schriftarten %%%%% Fonts %%%%%
+\usepackage[osf]{libertine}
+\defaultfontfeatures{Mapping=tex-text}
+\setmonofont[Scale=MatchLowercase]{Bitstream Vera Sans Mono}
+\setkomafont{sectioning}{\sffamily}% Überschriften
+\renewcommand{\headfont}{\normalfont\itshape}% Kolumnentitel
+
+%%%%% Fußnoten %%%%% Footnotes %%%%%
+\deffootnote%
+ {2em}% Einzug des Fußnotentextes; bei dreistelligen Fußnoten evtl. vergrößern
+ {1em}% zusätzlicher Absatzeinzug in der Fußnote
+ {%
+ \makebox[2em]% Raum für Fußnotenzeichen: ebenso groß wie Einzug des FN-Textes
+ [r]% Ausrichtung des Fußnotenzeichens: [r]echts, [l]inks
+ {\libertineLF% keine Mediävalziffern als Fußnotenmarke
+ \thefootnotemark%
+ \hspace{1em}% Abstand zw. FN-Zeichen und FN-Text
+ }%
+ }
+\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{}% keine Zeile zw. Text und Fußnoten
+
+%%%%% Kopf- und Fußzeilen %%%%% page header and footer %%%%%
+\usepackage{scrpage2}
+\pagestyle{scrheadings}
+\clearscrheadfoot
+
+%%%%% Farben %%%%% Colors %%%%%
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\definecolor{dkblue}{rgb}{0 0.1 0.5}% dark blue
+\definecolor{dkred}{rgb}{0.85 0 0}% dark red
+\definecolor{pyellow}{rgb}{1 0.97 0.75}% pale yellow
+
+%%%%% Kompakte Listen %%%%% Compact lists %%%%%
+\usepackage{enumitem}
+\setlist{noitemsep}
+\setitemize{leftmargin=*,nolistsep}
+\setenumerate{leftmargin=*,nolistsep}
+
+%%%%% Datumsformat %%%%% Date format %%%%%
+\usepackage{isodate}
+\numdate[arabic]% 15. 9. 2008
+\isotwodigitdayfalse% führende Nullen weglassen
+
+%%%%% Spracheinstellungen %%%%% Language settings %%%%%
+\usepackage{babel}
+\newcommand{\versionname}{Version}
+\iflanguage{english}{\renewcommand{\versionname}{version}}{}
+\iflanguage{german}{\monthyearsepgerman{\,}{\,}}{}
+\iflanguage{ngerman}{\monthyearsepgerman{\,}{\,}}{}
+\iflanguage{english}{\isodate}{}
+
+%%%%% Verschiedene Pakete %%%%% Miscellaneous packages
+\usepackage{microtype}% optischer Randausgleich
+\usepackage{dtk-logos}% Logos wie \BibTeX etc.
+\usepackage{xspace}
+\usepackage{textcomp}% Text-Companion-Symbole
+\usepackage{manfnt}% für das Achtung-Symbol
+\usepackage{marginnote}
+\reversemarginpar
+
+%%%%% Auslassungspunkte %%%%% dots %%%%%
+\let\ldotsOld\ldots
+\renewcommand{\ldots}{\ldotsOld\unkern}
+
+%%%%% Zwischenraum vor und nach \slash %%%%% Spacing around \slash %%%%%
+\let\slashOld\slash
+\renewcommand{\slash}{\kern.05em\slashOld\kern.05em}
+
+%%%%% Anführungszeichen %%%%% quotation marks %%%%%
+\usepackage[babel,german=guillemets]{csquotes}
+
+%%%%% Listings %%%%% listings %%%%%
+\usepackage{listings}
+\lstset{%
+ frame=none,
+% backgroundcolor=\color{pyellow},
+ language=[LaTeX]TeX,
+ basicstyle=\ttfamily\small,
+ commentstyle=\color{red},
+ keywordstyle=, % LaTeX-Befehle werden nicht fett dargestellt
+ numbers=none,%left/right
+% numberstyle=\tiny\lnstyle,
+% numbersep=5pt,
+% numberblanklines=false,
+ breaklines=true,
+% caption=\lstname,
+ xleftmargin=5pt,
+ xrightmargin=5pt,
+ escapeinside={(*}{*)},
+ belowskip=\medskipamount,
+ prebreak=\mbox{$\hookleftarrow$}% übernommen vom scrguide (KOMA-Script)
+}
+
+%%%%% biblatex %%%%% biblatex %%%%%
+\usepackage[%
+ bibencoding=utf8,
+ style=authortitle-dw,
+% bernhard=true,%
+ journalnumber=date
+]{biblatex}
+\addbibresource{examples/examples-dw.bib}
+
+%%%%% Hyperref %%%%% Hyperref %%%%%
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\hypersetup{%
+ colorlinks=true,%
+ linkcolor=dkblue,% Links
+ citecolor=dkblue,% Links zu Literaturangaben
+ urlcolor=dkblue,% Links ins Internet
+ pdftitle={biblatex-dw},%
+ pdfsubject={Dokumentation des LaTeX-Pakets biblatex-dw},%
+ pdfauthor={Dominik Waßenhoven},%
+ pdfstartview=FitH,%
+ bookmarksopen=true,%
+ bookmarksopenlevel=2,%
+ pdfprintscaling=None,%
+}
+
+%%%%% Kurzbefehle %%%%% shortening commands %%%%%
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{dkblue}{#1}}
+\newcommand{\wert}[1]{\textcolor{dkblue}{\enquote*{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\paket}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\xbx}[1]{\enquote{#1}}
+
+\makeatletter
+\newcommand{\tmp@beschreibung}{}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\beschreibung[2][]{%
+ \bgroup
+ \def\tmp@beschreibung{#1}%
+ \ifx\tmp@beschreibung\@empty
+ % leerer Fall
+ \label{#2}%
+ \marginpar{\footnotesize\sffamily\textcolor{dkblue}{#2}}%
+ \else
+ % unleerer Fall
+ \label{#1}%
+ \marginpar{\footnotesize\sffamily\textcolor{dkblue}{#2}}%
+ \fi
+ \egroup
+}
+\newcommand{\tmp@beschreibungcmd}{}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\beschreibungcmd[2][]{%
+ \bgroup
+ \def\tmp@beschreibungcmd{#1}%
+ \ifx\tmp@beschreibungcmd\@empty
+ % leerer Fall
+ \label{#2}%
+ \marginpar{\footnotesize\sffamily\textcolor{dkblue}{\textbackslash #2}}%
+ \else
+ % unleerer Fall
+ \label{#1}%
+ \marginpar{\footnotesize\sffamily\textcolor{dkblue}{\textbackslash #2}}%
+ \fi
+ \egroup
+}
+\makeatother
+
+\newcommand{\bl}{\paket{biblatex}}
+\newcommand{\bldw}{\paket{biblatex-dw}}
+
+% \optlist[nur bei xy]{Option}{Wert} -> Option (Wert)
+% \optset[nur bei xy]{Option}{Wert} -> Option=Wert
+% \opt{Option}
+% \optnur[nur bei xy]{Option}
+% \befehl{Befehlsname}{Definition}{Beschreibung}
+% \befehlleer{Befehlsname}{Beschreibung}
+\newcommand{\optlist}[3][]{\item[\option{#2}](#3) \emph{#1}\hfill%
+ {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{#2}}\\}}
+\newcommand{\optset}[3][]{\item[\option{#2=#3}] \emph{#1}\\}
+\newcommand{\opt}[1]{\item[\option{#1}]~\hfill%
+ {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{#1}}\\}}
+\newcommand{\optnur}[2][]{\item[\option{#2}]\emph{#1}\hfill%
+ {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{#2}}\\}}
+\newcommand{\befehl}[3]{\item[\option{\cmd{#1}}]\texttt{#2}\\{#3}}
+\newcommand{\befehlmitverweis}[2]{\item[\option{\cmd{#1}}]~\hfill%
+ {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{#1}}}\\{#2}}
+\newcommand{\befehlleer}[2]{\item[\option{\cmd{#1}}]\emph{(\iflanguage{english}{empty}{leer})}\\{#2}}
+\newcommand{\biblstring}[3]{%
+ \item[\option{#1}]\texttt{#2}\hspace{0.4em}\textbullet\hspace{0.4em}\texttt{#3}}
+\newcommand{\feldformat}[3]{\item[{\option{\cmd{DeclareFieldFormat\{{#1}\}\{}\cmd{#2\}}}}]~\\#3}
+\newcommand{\eintragstyp}[3]{\item[{\texttt{@#1}}]#2 {\small(in \bl{}:
+ \iflanguage{ngerman}{wie}{same as} \texttt{@#3})}\hfill%
+ {\footnotesize\sffamily\seite{\pageref{@#1}}}}
+
+\newcommand{\achtung}{\marginnote{\footnotesize\dbend}}
+
+\newcounter{beispiel}
+\newcommand{\beispiel}{%
+ \iflanguage{english}{Example}{Beispiel}}
+\newcommand{\seite}[1]{%
+ \iflanguage{english}{page~#1}{Seite~#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\Mindestanforderung}{%
+ \iflanguage{english}%
+ {\textcolor{dkred}{needs at least version~\mindestanforderung{} of \bl{}}}%
+ {\textcolor{dkred}{benötigt mindestens Version~\mindestanforderung{} von \bl{}}}}
+
+\newcommand{\Testversion}{%
+ \iflanguage{english}%
+ {~and was tested with \bl{} version~\testversion{} and \paket{biber} version~\biberversion{}}%
+ {~und wurde mit Version~\testversion{} von \bl{} sowie Version~\biberversion{} von \paket{biber} getestet}}
+
+%%%%% Titelei %%%%% title page %%%%%
+\author{Dominik Waßenhoven}
+\title{biblatex-dw}
+\date{Version~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}
+
+%%%%% Worttrennungen %%%%% Hyphenation %%%%%
+\usepackage[htt]{hyphenat}
+\hyphenation{
+ Stan-dard-ein-stel-lun-gen
+}
+
+\nonfrenchspacing \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-print.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-print.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2c54dddd09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-print.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+%!TEX encoding = UTF-8 Unicode
+% biblatex-dw
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2016
+%
+% This file configures the documentation
+% of biblatex-dw to be printed
+
+%%%%% KOMA-Script Optionen %%%%% KOMA-Script options %%%%%
+\KOMAoptions{
+ paper=a4
+ ,headinclude=true
+% ,fontsize=12pt,DIV=calc
+ ,fontsize=11pt,DIV=9
+}
+
+%%%%% Mindestanforderung %%%%% Minimum requirement
+\renewcommand{\Mindestanforderung}{%
+ \iflanguage{english}%
+ {needs at least version~\mindestanforderung{} of \bl{}}%
+ {mindestens Version~\mindestanforderung{} von \bl{}}}
+
+%%%%% Kopf- und Fußzeilen %%%%% page header and footer %%%%%
+\ihead{%
+ \iflanguage{english}%
+ {biblatex-dw documentation}%
+ {Dokumentation von biblatex-dw}}
+\ohead{\versionname~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}% Kopf rechts
+\cfoot{\pagemark}
+
+%%%%% Lizenzhinweis %%%%% note on licence %%%%%
+\renewcommand{\lizenz}{%
+ \vfill
+ \begin{quote}
+ \small
+ \itshape
+ \iflanguage{english}{%
+ This manual is part of the \bldw\ package. It may be distributed and\slash
+ or modified under the conditions of the \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public
+ License}. For more details, please have a look at the
+ \enquote{\texttt{README}} file.
+ }{%
+ Dieses Handbuch ist Teil des Pakets \bldw. Es darf nach den Bedingungen
+ der \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public Licence} verteilt und\slash oder
+ verändert werden. Für weitere Informationen schauen Sie bitte in die Datei
+ \enquote{\texttt{LIESMICH}}.
+ }%
+ \end{quote}
+ \clearpage}
+
+%%%%% Inhaltsverzeichnis %%%%% Table of Contents %%%%%
+\let\TOC\tableofcontents
+
+%%%%% Keine farbigen Links %%%%% No coloured links %%%%%
+\hypersetup{%
+ colorlinks=false,%
+ %linkcolor=dkblue,% Links
+ %citecolor=dkblue,% Links zu Literaturangaben
+ %urlcolor=dkblue,% Links ins Internet
+ %pdftitle={biblatex-dw},%
+ %pdfsubject={Dokumentation des LaTeX-Pakets biblatex-dw},%
+ %pdfauthor={Dominik Waßenhoven},%
+ %pdfstartview=FitH,%
+% bookmarksopen=true,%
+% bookmarksopenlevel=0,%
+ %pdfprintscaling=None,%
+}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-screen.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-screen.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d7002df124
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw-screen.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+%!TEX encoding = UTF-8 Unicode
+% biblatex-dw
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2016
+%
+% This file configures the documentation
+% of biblatex-dw to be viewed on a screen
+
+%%%%% Satzspiegel %%%%% type area %%%%%
+% übernommen aus dem scrguide von Markus Kohm
+% adopted from Markus Kohm's scrguide
+\usepackage{geometry}
+\geometry{papersize={140mm,210mm},%
+ includehead,includemp,reversemp,marginparwidth=2em,%
+ vmargin={2mm,4mm},hmargin=2mm}%
+
+%%%%% Kopf- und Fußzeilen %%%%% page header and footer %%%%%
+% zu großen Teilen übernommen aus dem scrguide von Markus Kohm
+% for the most part adopted from Markus Kohm's scrguide
+\makeatletter
+ \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\oddsidemargin}%
+ \addtolength{\@tempdimc}{1in}%
+ \setheadwidth[-\@tempdimc]{paper}%
+\makeatother
+\ohead{\smash{%
+ \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}\pagemark\hspace{2mm}}}%
+\ihead[%
+ {\smash{\colorbox{pyellow}{%
+ \makebox[\dimexpr\linewidth-2\fboxsep\relax][l]{%
+ \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}%
+ \makebox[2em][r]%
+ biblatex-dw, \versionname~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}}}}]%
+ {\smash{\colorbox{pyellow}{%
+ \makebox[\dimexpr\linewidth-2\fboxsep\relax][l]{%
+ \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}%
+ \makebox[2em][r]%
+ biblatex-dw, \versionname~\biblatexdwversion, \biblatexdwdate}}}}%
+
+%%%%% Hinweis zur Bildschirmversion %%%%% note on screen version %%%%%
+\renewcommand{\screenversion}{%
+ \begin{quote}
+ \small
+ \color{dkred}
+ \sffamily
+ \iflanguage{english}{%
+ This is the screen version of the \bldw{} documentation.
+ If you would like to have a printable version, please have a look
+ at the \enquote{\texttt{README}} file.
+ }{%
+ Dies ist die Bildschirmversion der Dokumentation von \bldw{}.
+ Wenn Sie eine Druckversion haben möchten, schauen Sie bitte in die
+ Datei \enquote{\texttt{LIESMICH}}.
+ }%
+ \end{quote}}
+
+%%%%% Lizenzhinweis %%%%% note on licence %%%%%
+\renewcommand{\lizenz}{%
+ \vfill
+ \begin{quote}
+ \small
+ \itshape
+ \iflanguage{english}{%
+ This manual is part of the \bldw\ package. It may be distributed and\slash
+ or modified under the conditions of the \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public
+ License}. For more details, please have a look at the
+ \enquote{\texttt{README}} file.
+ }{%
+ Dieses Handbuch ist Teil des Pakets \bldw. Es darf nach den Bedingungen
+ der \enquote{\LaTeX\ Project Public Licence} verteilt und\slash oder
+ verändert werden. Für weitere Informationen schauen Sie bitte in die Datei
+ \enquote{\texttt{LIESMICH}}.
+ }%
+ \end{quote}}
+
+%%%%% Kein Inhaltsverzeichnis %%%%% No Table of Contents %%%%%
+\renewcommand{\TOC}{\clearpage} \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bc9bf9f977
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ddb76a24d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/biblatex-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1364 @@
+%!TEX TS-program = xelatex
+%!TEX encoding = UTF-8 Unicode
+
+% biblatex-dw
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2013
+
+\documentclass[english]{scrartcl}
+\input{biblatex-dw-preamble}% preamble
+%\input{biblatex-dw-print}% printable version
+\input{biblatex-dw-screen}% screen version
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Begin of Document %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+\abstract{\noindent \bldw{} is a small collection of styles for the
+ \bl{} package. It was designed for citations in the
+ Humanities and offers some features that are not provided
+ by the standard \bl{} styles. \bldw{} is dependent
+ on \bl{}~-- version~\biblatexdwversion{} \Mindestanforderung{}\Testversion.
+ Please note also the requirements of the \bl{} package itself.}
+
+\lizenz
+\screenversion
+\TOC
+
+\section{Introduction}
+\subsection{Installation}
+\bldw{} is part of the distributions MiK\TeX{}\footnote{Website: \url{http://www.miktex.org}.}
+and \TeX{}~Live\footnote{Website: \url{http://www.tug.org/texlive}.}~-- thus, you
+can easily install it using the respective package manager. If you would like to
+install \bldw{} manually, do the following:
+Extract the archive \texttt{biblatex-dw.tds.zip} to the \texttt{\$LOCALTEXMF} directory of
+ your system.\footnote{If you don't know what that is, have a look at
+\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=tds} or
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tds/tds.html}.} Refresh your filename database.
+Here is some additional information from the UK \TeX\ FAQ:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \href{%
+ http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=install-where}{%
+ Where to install packages}
+ \item \href{%
+ http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=inst-wlcf}{%
+ Installing files \enquote{where \LaTeXTeX\ can find them}}
+ \item \href{%
+ http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=privinst}{%
+ \enquote{Private} installations of files}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Usage}
+The styles are loaded in the same way as the \bl{} standard styles:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex}
+\end{lstlisting}
+or
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex}
+\end{lstlisting}
+The styles are built in a very entangled way which means that the combination of a \bldw\ style with another style is not possible without fail.
+For an overview of the styles see the examples \enquote{en-authortitle-dw}
+ and \enquote{en-footnote-dw} in the \texttt{examples} folder.
+
+\subsection{Global options and entry options}
+The options provided by \bl{} are also available with \bldw{}.
+The additional options provided by \bldw{} are described on the next pages.
+There is a general difference between global options and entry options:
+global options are valid for all references of a document; they are set
+either as optional arguments when loading \bl{} or in a separate config
+file (\texttt{biblatex.cfg}). Entry options are set in the field
+\texttt{options} of an entry in the bib file. Entry options can sometimes override
+global options for the respective entry.
+
+\subsection{Frequently asked Questions (FAQ)}
+I answered some frequently asked questions concerning \bl{} and \bldw{} and made them
+available online:\\
+\url{http://biblatex.dominik-wassenhoven.de/faq.shtml?en}
+
+\subsection{Development}
+\bldw{} is an open source project hosted at \href{http://sourceforge.net}{sourceforge.net}. The code (also of the latest, not released version) can be downloaded.\footnote{\url{http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/code}.} At sourceforge.net you have also the possibility to file bug reports (if possible, including a minimal example)\footnote{\url{http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Bugs}.} and feature requests.\footnote{\url{http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Features}.}
+
+\section{The \xbx{authortitle-dw} style}
+This style is based on the standard \xbx{authortitle} style.
+Besides some changes in punctuation, there are the following differences:
+
+\subsection{Appearance in the bibliography}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item The\beschreibung{namefont} font shape of authors and editors can be set by the options
+ \option{namefont} and\beschreibung{firstnamefont} \option{firstnamefont} which can take the values
+ \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and \wert{normal}.
+ If you set \option{useprefix=true}, \option{namefont} affects also
+ the name prefix (i.\,e. \enquote{von}, \enquote{de} etc.). If \option{%
+ useprefix=false} is set (which is the default), the name prefix depends
+ on the option \option{firstnamefont} which in every case affects the
+ name suffix (the \enquote{junior} part).
+ \item If\beschreibung{oldauthor} you set the \option{namefont}, but nevertheless need some
+ of the names being typeset in upright shape (e.g. medieval or
+ antique authors), you can add \texttt{options\,=\,\{oldauthor=true\}}
+ to the respective entry of your
+ bib file. If you have to switch back to the normal appearance also
+ for entries with this \texttt{oldauthor} flag, you can set the global
+ option \option{oldauthor=false} in order to override the entry option.
+ \item There\beschreibung{oldbookauthor} is also the entry option \option{oldbookauthor}
+ which is the same as \option{oldauthor} but for the bookauthor. This is
+ useful for \texttt{@inbook} entries representing, e.g., an introduction to an
+ edition of a work by an author that should not be typeset in the usual font
+ for last names. This option can be set on a per entry basis and can be
+ disabled with the global option \option{oldauthor=false}.
+ \item The\beschreibung{idemfont} font shape of the \enquote{idem} string (see below) can be set by
+ the option \option{idemfont} which can take the values
+ \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and \wert{normal}. If you
+ do not use this option, the \enquote{idem} string is printed in the
+ same font shape as indicated by the option \option{namefont}.
+ \item The\beschreibung{ibidemfont} font shape of the \enquote{ibidem} string (see below) can be set by
+ the option \option{ibidemfont} which can take the values
+ \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and \wert{normal}. The
+ default value is \wert{normal}.
+ \item The\beschreibung{acronyms}\beschreibung{acronym}
+ \texttt{shorthands} and journal abbreviations (\texttt{shortjournal})
+ can be set with the command \cmd{mkbibacro} (default for this command:
+ \textsc{smallcaps}). For that, you need to set the global option
+ \option{acronyms} to \wert{true} \emph{and} the entry option \option{acronym=true}.
+ If you want to customize the command \cmd{mkbibacro}, see section
+ \enquote{\nameref{mkbibacro-anpassen}} on page~\pageref{mkbibacro-anpassen}.
+ \item The\beschreibung{idembib} option \option{idembib} provides a possibility to substitute
+ identical authors\slash editors in subsequent entries in the
+ bibliography by an idem phrase. If set to \wert{false}, the names are
+ given also in subsequent entries of the same authors\slash editors.
+ Using \option{idembib=true}, the substitution is enabled. The format
+ is then set by the option\beschreibung{idembibformat} \option{idembibformat} which can take the
+ values \wert{idem} to get \enquote{idem} instead of the name(s) and
+ \wert{dash} to get a dash (---). In some languages, the idem phrase
+ is gender-specific. The gender for authors\slash editors has to be
+ given in the \texttt{gender} field of your bib file (see the \bl{}
+ documentation for details). The default value for \option{idembib} is
+ \wert{true}, the default value for \option{idembibformat} is
+ \wert{idem}.
+ \item When\beschreibung{edbyidem} \texttt{author} and \texttt{editor} are the same in
+ \texttt{@inbook}, \texttt{@incollection} or \texttt{@inreference} entries, the name is not
+ repeated but substituted by the string \enquote{idem}. This feature
+ is controled by the option \option{edbyidem} which can be set to
+ \wert{true} or \wert{false}; the default value is \wert{true}.
+ \item The\beschreibung{editorstring} option \option{editorstring} can take the values
+ \wert{parens}, \wert{brackets} and \wert{normal}; the default is
+ \wert{parens}. This option sets the string \enquote{editor}
+ (abbreviated \enquote{ed.}) in parentheses or in brackets. If you set
+ the option to \wert{normal}, the editor string is not
+ surrounded by parentheses or brackets. Instead, a comma is added after
+ the editor's name.
+ If \option{usetranslator=true} is used, the setting for
+ \option{editorstring} is also valid for the string
+ \enquote{translator} (abbreviated \enquote{trans.}).
+ \item The\beschreibung{editorstringfont} option \option{editorstringfont}
+ determines the font used for the editor string (and
+ translator string). With \wert{normal},
+ the normal font is used, with \wert{namefont}, the setting for the option
+ \option{namefont} is also used for the editor string. The default value for this
+ option is \wert{normal}.
+ \item Using\beschreibung{pseudoauthor} the entry option \option{pseudoauthor}, the author can be put
+ in brackets or omitted. This is useful for editions of works whose authors
+ are not named, but are known, for instance. If the global option \option{pseudoauthor}
+ is set to \wert{true} (and the entry option \option{pseudoauthor} is used), the author of this
+ entry is printed. The new commands \cmd{bibleftpseudo} and \cmd{bibrightpseudo}
+ are used to enclose the author. These commands are empty by default. If you would like to enclose
+ the author by brackets, for instance, you have to redefine the commands:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{\bibleftbracket}
+\renewcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{\bibrightbracket}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ If the global option
+ \option{pseudoauthor} is set to \wert{false}, the author of entries
+ with the entry option \option{pseudoauthor} are not printed at
+ all. The default value for the global option is \wert{true}
+ (i.e. the behaviour is the same regardless of the entry
+ option \option{pseudoauthor}).
+ \item With\beschreibung{nopublisher} default settings, the \texttt{publisher} is not printed, only
+ \texttt{location} and \texttt{date}. If you would like to have the
+ publisher printed, you have to set the option
+ \option{nopublisher=false}.
+ \item You\beschreibung{nolocation} can also suppress the location with \option{nolocation=true}. In
+ this case, also the publisher is omitted (regardless of the setting of
+ \option{nopublisher}). The default setting is \wert{false}.
+ \item The\beschreibung{pagetotal} fields \texttt{doi}, \texttt{eprint}, \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn},
+ \texttt{issn} and \texttt{pagetotal} are not printed with the default
+ settings. They can however be switched on with the options
+ \option{doi=true}, \option{eprint=true}, \option{isbn=true} (which is also valid
+ for the fields \texttt{isrn} and \texttt{issn}) or \option{pagetotal=true},
+ respectively.
+ \item The\beschreibung{origfields} option \option{origfields} lets you decide, whether you would like
+ to have the fields \texttt{origlocation}, \texttt{origpublisher} and
+ \texttt{origdate} printed or not; the standard is \wert{true}. If you
+ use the option and the field \texttt{origlocation} is set, the
+ \enquote{orig} fields will be printed. In this case, the fields
+ \texttt{location}, \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{date} are appended
+ in parentheses, preluded by the bibstring \texttt{reprint}. Note that
+ the fields \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{origpublisher} are only
+ printed, if the option \option{nopublisher=false} is given.
+ \achtung Note also that the \texttt{edition} field applies to the
+ original edition, as reprints are normally not released in more than
+ one edition, but re-issue a specific edition. If the option
+ \option{edsuper} is used, the edition is printed as superscript number
+ ahead of \texttt{origdate}.
+ \item With\beschreibung{origfieldsformat} the option \option{origfieldsformat}, which can take the values
+ \wert{parens}, \wert{brackets} and \wert{punct}, you can set the
+ appearance of the reprint details (with \option{origfields=true}). The
+ values \wert{parens} and \wert{brackets} put them in parentheses or
+ brackets, respectively. The default is \wert{punct}; this means that
+ the reprint details are introduced by the punctuation command
+ \cmd{origfieldspunct}, which is preset to a comma.
+ \item The punctuation before \texttt{titleaddon}, \texttt{booktitleaddon}
+ and \texttt{maintitleaddon} is controlled by the new command
+ \cmd{titleaddonpunct}. The default is a period.
+ \item With\beschreibung{edsuper} \option{edsuper=true},
+ the edition is printed as superscript number (not as ordinal number)
+ just before the year. The default value for this option is
+ \wert{false}.\\
+ \achtung Note that this works only, if you have integers in the field
+ \texttt{edition}, and nothing but integers. Information like
+ \enquote{5th, revised and expanded edition} in the \texttt{edition}
+ field will be printed as usual, not as a superscript number.
+ Additionally, a warning will appear. If you would like to use the
+ option \option{edsuper} for one of your documents, you should ensure
+ that you put only integers into the \texttt{edition} field and use the
+ field \texttt{note} for more detailed information on editions.
+ \item With\beschreibung{editionstring} \option{editionstring=true}, the
+ bibliography string \enquote{edition} will be added to the
+ \texttt{edition} field, even if it is not an integer. Thus,
+ you can type, e.g.,
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+edition = {2., revised}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ in your bib file and you will get \enquote{2., revised ed.}
+ \option{editionstring=false} will give the additional bibliography
+ string only if there is an integer in the \texttt{edition} field
+ (which is \bl's standard behaviour).
+ The default for this option is \wert{false}.
+ \item If\beschreibung{shortjournal} the option \option{shortjournal} is set to \wert{true}, the
+ field \texttt{shortjournal} is used instead of \texttt{journaltitle}.
+ This is useful for journal abbreviations.
+ \item If the \texttt{volume} field is not present for a journal, the
+ \texttt{year} is \emph{not} printed in parenthesis: \enquote{Journal
+ name 2008}. But if the \texttt{month} field is set (or the \texttt{date} field
+ contains a month, e.g. \texttt{2008-03}), the date is
+ separated from the journal title by an additional comma.
+ \item The\beschreibung{journalnumber} option \option{journalnumber} allows you to adjust the position of
+ a journal's \texttt{number}: with \wert{standard}, the behaviour of the
+ standard styles is used, but you can configure the separator between
+ \texttt{volume} and \texttt{number} with the new command
+ \cmd{jourvolnumsep} (default: \cmd{adddot}). With \wert{afteryear} the
+ number is printed after the \texttt{year} and introduced by the
+ command \cmd{journumstring}: \enquote{Journal name 28 (2008), no.~2}.
+ The value \wert{date} assures that the date is printed, even if the
+ field \texttt{issue} is given (this is not the case in the standard
+ styles).
+ Additionally, \option{journalnumber=date} prints the number before the
+ date, if the date (at least year and month) is given, but it prints
+ the number after the year, if only the year is given (i.e. if the date
+ contains only a year). See section~\ref{journalnumberdate} on
+ page~\pageref{journalnumberdate} for details. The default for
+ \option{journalnumber} is \wert{standard}.
+ \item The command \cmd{journumstring} introduces the journal number.
+ The standard is \wert{, no.~}. The command can be redefined,
+ e.g.:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\journumstring}{\addspace}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item The command \cmd{jourvolstring} introduces the journal volume.
+ The standard is a space. The command can be redefined, e.g.:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\jourvolstring}{%
+ \addspace vol\adddot\space}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item The\beschreibung{series} option \option{series} affects the position of the \texttt{series}
+ field, possible values are \wert{afteryear}, \wert{beforeedition} and \wert{standard}. This affects the entry types \texttt{@book}, \texttt{@inbook},
+ \texttt{@collection}, \texttt{@incollection}, \texttt{@proceedings},
+ \texttt{@inproceedings} and \texttt{@manual}.
+ If set to \wert{afteryear} or \wert{beforeedition}, the series will be put after the year or before the edition.
+ The standard value for this option is \wert{standard}, the series will be printed before the location.
+ \item The\beschreibung{seriesformat} option \option{seriesformat} can
+ take the values \wert{standard} and \wert{parens}. If set to
+ \wert{parens}, \texttt{series} and \texttt{number} (of a book etc.)
+ will be printed in parentheses, otherwise without (as is the biblatex
+ standard behaviour). The default value for this option is \wert{parens}.
+ \item The command \cmd{seriespunct} is the punctuation before the
+ \texttt{series} (of a book etc.). With \option{seriesformat=parens},
+ this punctuation is set inside the
+ parentheses. You can set it e.g. to \wert{=\cmd{addspace}} which is
+ common in some fields. The default is empty, i.e.\ the series is
+ printed right after the opening round bracket.
+ \item The command \cmd{sernumstring} is the punctuation between the
+ \texttt{series} (of a book etc.) and its \texttt{number}. The default
+ is \wert{\cmd{addspace}}. You can easily redefine it, e.g.:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\sernumstring}{%
+ \addcomma\space\bibstring{volume}\addspace}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ This would give \enquote{(Name of Series, vol. N)}.
+ \item Using\beschreibung{shorthandinbib} option \option{shorthandinbib=true},
+ the shorthands are printed in the bibliography, enclosed by brackets, preceding
+ the respective entry. The appearance is controlled by the field format
+ \enquote{shorthandinbib} which can of course be redefined. If you want to get
+ rid of the default brackets, for instance, you should do the following:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandinbib}{#1}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ In this case there will only be a space between shorthand and bibliography entry,
+ so that you should redefine the punctuation as well which is printed by the
+ command \cmd{shorthandinbibpunct}. You could alter it to print, for example, an equal
+ sign, but you should use \cmd{nopunct} in order to avoid superfluous punctuation:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\shorthandinbibpunct}{%
+ \addspace=\nopunct\addspace}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item The\beschreibung{annotation} option \option{annotation} is introduced. If it is set to
+ \wert{true}, the field \texttt{annotation} will be printed in
+ \textit{\small small italic} typeface at the end of the entry. The
+ default value for this option is \wert{false}.
+ You can alter the appearance by redefining the following command:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\annotationfont}{\small\itshape}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item The\beschreibung{library} option \option{library} is introduced. If it is set to
+ \wert{true}, the field \texttt{library} will be printed in
+ {\small\sffamily small sans serif} typeface at the end of the entry.
+ The default value for this option is \wert{false}.
+ You can alter the appearance by redefining the following command:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\libraryfont}{\small\sffamily}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item If both \option{annotation} and \option{library} are set to
+ \wert{true}, the contents of the \texttt{annotation} field is placed
+ before the contents of the \texttt{library} field.
+ \item In\beschreibung{@inreference}
+ normal \bl{}, the entry type \texttt{@inreference} is an alias for
+ \texttt{@incollection} entries. In \bldw{}, this entry type can be used
+ for articles in encyclopedias or dictionaries. The output is similar to
+ that of an \texttt{@incollection}, but there are some differences:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item The title is enclosed in quotes.
+ \item The bibliography string \enquote{inrefstring} (standard:
+ \enquote{article}\slash\enquote{art.}) is put in front
+ of the title.
+ \item The location is not printed.
+ \item With a \texttt{volume} present, the output is e.g. \enquote{in:
+ Encyclopedia 2 (1990), p. 120.}
+ \end{itemize}
+ The \texttt{@reference} entry type still is an alias to \texttt{@collection}.
+ Thus, you can use either \texttt{@collection} or \texttt{@reference} for
+ a work of reference.
+ \item Using the\beschreibung{inreference} option \option{inreference=full},
+ \texttt{@inreference} entries are printed always in full, but are omitted
+ from the bibliography. Note that when using \option{xref=false}, you have to
+ cite the corresponding \texttt{@reference} entry manually (e.g. with \cmd{nocite})
+ if you wish to include the \texttt{@reference} entry in the bibliography. The
+ \option{inreference} option complies with both \option{ibidtracker} and
+ \option{idemtracker}. The default for this option is \wert{normal}.
+
+ \item In\beschreibung{@review}
+ normal \bl{}, the entry type \texttt{@review} is an alias for
+ \texttt{@article} entries. In \bldw{}, this entry type can be used
+ for reviews. The output is similar to \texttt{@article}, with the
+ following differences:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item The title is enclosed in quotes.
+ \item The bibliography string \enquote{reviewof} (standard:
+ \enquote{Review of}) is put in front of the title.
+ \item Instead of manually entering the data for the reviewed work in the \texttt{title}
+ field of the \texttt{@review} entry, it is also possible to add a reference in the field
+ \texttt{xref}. The entry with the \BibTeX\ key given in the \texttt{xref} field
+ will be cited. Using this approach, options like \option{namefont} or
+ \option{firstfull} are considered also for the reviewed work.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Appearance in citations}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item In citations of the same author\slash editor as the
+ immediately preceding citation the name is replaced by
+ the string \enquote{idem} unless the citation is the first
+ one on the current page. This feature is controled by the
+ \bl{} option \option{idemtracker} which is set to \wert{constrict}. If
+ you would like to switch off the idem functionality, you can use
+ \option{idemtracker=false}. For more information on the
+ \option{idemtracker} option see the \bl{} manual.
+ \item Immediately repeated citations are replaced by the string
+ \enquote{ibidem} unless the citation is the first one on
+ the current page. This behaviour can be suppressed with
+ the \bl{} option \option{ibidtracker=false}. In this case,
+ the \enquote{idem} functionality
+ is still active as long as you do not set the option
+ \option{idemtracker=false}.
+ \item The\beschreibung{shorthandibid} option \option{shorthandibid} controls whether
+ immediately repeated citations with a \texttt{shorthand}
+ should also be replaced by the string \enquote{ibidem} or
+ not. Possible values are \wert{true} and \wert{false},
+ the default value is \wert{true}. Note that this option has
+ no effect if you set the option \option{ibidtracker=false}.
+ Note also that this behaviour can be overridden
+ for each entry by using \texttt{options\,=\,\{shorthandibid=true\}} or
+ \texttt{options\,=\,\{shorthandibid=false\}}, respectively.
+ \item With\beschreibung{addyear} the option \option{addyear}, the year of the
+ publication will be added after the title. The year appears in
+ parentheses. The default for this option is \wert{false}.
+ \item With\beschreibung{omiteditor} \option{useeditor=false} and \option{omiteditor=true}, the editor
+ in citations will be omitted. The same applies to the short citations in
+ the bibliography, if the xref functionality is in use. With
+ \option{useeditor=true}, the option \option{omiteditor} has
+ no effect. The default for this option is \wert{false}.
+ \item With\beschreibung[edstringincitations]{edstring\-incitations}
+ the option \option{edstringincitations=true}, the editor and
+ translator strings are shown in citations (not only in the full
+ citations). The appearance depends on how the option \option{editorstring}
+ is set. The default value for this option is \wert{true}.
+ \item If you use the \cmd{textcite} command with an entry that
+ lacks author and editor, \bl{} will give you a warning
+ and output the entry's key in bold face.
+ \item The\beschreibung{firstfull} option \option{firstfull} delivers a full citation for the first
+ occurence of an entry. The default value for this option is
+ \wert{false}.
+ \item If\beschreibung{citedas} a \texttt{shorthand} is given and the option \option{firstfull}
+ is set to \wert{true}, the addition \enquote{henceforth
+ cited as~\ldots} will be added to the citation. This behaviour can
+ be influenced by the option \option{citedas}, which can take
+ the values \wert{true} or \wert{false}; the default
+ is \wert{true}. Note that this behaviour can also be overridden
+ for each entry by using \texttt{options\,= \{citedas=true\}} or
+ \texttt{options\,=\,\{citedas=false\}}, respectively.
+ \item The\beschreibung{citepages}
+ option \option{citepages} allows you to suppress pages or page ranges
+ in full citations, if the field \texttt{pages} is given:
+ \option{citepages=permit} allows duplicates, i.e. the \texttt{pages}
+ field as well as the \texttt{postnote} are printed;
+ with \option{citepages=suppress} the \texttt{pages} field of the full citations
+ will be suppressed in any case, thus only the \texttt{postnote} is printed;
+ \option{citepages=omit} omits the \texttt{pages} only if the \texttt{postnote}
+ is a number;
+ \option{citepages=separate} always prints the \texttt{pages} field, but separates
+ the \texttt{postnote} by using the string \enquote{here}, if it is a number.
+ In this case, the \emph{bibliography string} \enquote{thiscite} is used.
+ The standard value for this option is \wert{separate}.
+ A small illustrating example which uses the following \cmd{cite} commands:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\cite{key}
+\cite[a note]{key}
+\cite[125]{key}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ %
+ \option{citepages=permit}:
+ \begin{quote}
+ Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150.
+
+ Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+ Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150, p.\,125.
+ \end{quote}
+ %
+ \option{citepages=suppress}:
+ \begin{quote}
+ Author: Title, in: Book.
+
+ Author: Title, in: Book, a note.
+
+ Author: Title, in: Book, p.\,125.
+ \end{quote}
+ %
+ \option{citepages=omit}:
+ \begin{quote}
+ Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150.
+
+ Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+ Author: Title, in: Book, p.\,125.
+ \end{quote}
+ %
+ \option{citepages=separate}:
+ \begin{quote}
+ Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150.
+
+ Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150, a note.
+
+ Author: Title, in: Book, pp.\,100--150, here p.\,125.
+ \end{quote}
+ \item The\beschreibung{citeauthor} \option{citeauthor} option controls the name format for
+ the \cmd{citeauthor} command; it can take the values \wert{namefont},
+ \wert{namefontfoot} and \wert{normalfont}. With \option{citeauthor=namefont} the
+ same format as set by the option \option{namefont} is used. This is the default
+ behaviour. With \option{citeauthor=normalfont} the normal font is always used for
+ \cmd{citeauthor}, regardless of the \option{namefont} option. With
+ \option{citeauthor=namefontfoot} the \option{namefont} format is used if the
+ \cmd{citeauthor} command is inside a footnote, otherwise the normal font is used.
+ \item The\beschreibung{citeauthorname} option \option{citeauthorname} controls the
+ appearance of names when using the the commands \cmd{citeauthor} and \cmd{textcite}.
+ With \option{citeauthorname=firsfull}, the name is given in full when cited for the
+ first time; from the second citation onwards, only the last name is printed. This
+ works also with different citations from the same author, regardless whether you
+ only use \cmd{citeauthor} or \cmd{textcite} or both. With
+ \option{citeauthorname=full} the name is always given in full, with
+ \option{citeauthorname=normal} only the given name is printed.
+ The default value for this option is \wert{normal}.
+ \item If\beschreibung{singletitle} you use the \bl{} option \option{singletitle=true}, the title of
+ a cited work is only printed if there is more than one work of the same
+ author. See the biblatex documentation for details.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{List of Shorthands}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item The\beschreibung{terselos} list of shorthands contains only author (or editor), title and,
+ if necessary, booktitle or maintitle. This information should be
+ sufficient in order to find the full bibliographical data in the
+ bibliography. This feature is controled by the
+ option \option{terselos} which can be set to \wert{true} or
+ \wert{false}; the default value is \wert{true}.
+ \item Using\beschreibung{shorthandwidth} the option \option{shorthandwidth}, you can define the width of
+ the labels in the list of shorthands. This is especially useful when
+ you have very long shorthands. The option can take any length
+ definition for example \wert{40pt} or \wert{3em}. \achtung If you use
+ the option \option{shorthandwidth}, the spacing after the label is
+ reduced and a colon is inserted after every label. The punctuation
+ mark can be redefined with the command \cmd{shorthandpunct} and the
+ spacing is assigned by the new length \cmd{shorthandsep}. The standard
+ values (as soon as \option{shorthandwidth} is used) are:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\shorthandpunct}{\addcolon}
+\setlength{\shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{The \xbx{footnote-dw} style}
+
+This style is similar to \xbx{verbose-inote}. It is based on the
+\xbx{authortitle-dw} style. Thus, you can use all options defined in
+\xbx{authortitle-dw}; the only exceptions are the options \option{addyear},
+\option{firstfull} and \option{inreference}.
+Apart from that, there are the following differences between \xbx{footnote-dw} and
+\xbx{authortitle-dw}:
+\medskip
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Citations are \emph{only} possible inside footnotes. Citations
+ which are not inside footnotes will automatically be turned into
+ a \cmd{footcite}. The only exception is \cmd{textcite} which will
+ give the author's name in the text and a footnote citation; when used inside
+ a footnote, \cmd{textcite} will give the author's name, followed by the
+ citation in parenthesis.
+ \item The first citation will give a full reference, following citations
+ will only use \texttt{author} and \texttt{shorttitle} (or
+ \texttt{title}, if no \texttt{shorttitle} is given) with the
+ addition \enquote{see n.~\enquote{N}}, where \enquote{N} is
+ the number of the footnote where the first citation occured.
+ \item The\beschreibung{pageref} option \option{pageref} known from \bl's \xbx{verbose-note} and
+ \xbx{ver\-bose-inote} styles is also available. When set to \wert{true},
+ the page number is added to the footnote number pointing to the full
+ citation if it is located on a different page. This option defaults to
+ \wert{false}.
+ \item When using \cmd{parencite} outside a footnote, the parentheses
+ will be dropped and a \cmd{footcite} will be used instead. Inside
+ footnotes, the \cmd{parencite} command will work as expected. The
+ addition \enquote{see n.~\ldots} will be surrounded by brackets
+ instead of parentheses.
+ \item If one or both of the options \option{annotation} and \option{library}
+ are set to \wert{true}, the annotations and library information
+ are only printed in the bibliography (if there is one), but not in the
+ first citations and in the list of shorthands.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Crossref functionality}
+\label{xreffunctionality}
+\subsection{How it works}
+The\beschreibung{xref} crossref functionality of \bldw{} provides a possibility for
+dependent papers to refer to a parent entry. In order to use it, you
+have to create a parent entry of the type \texttt{@book}, \texttt{@collection}
+or \texttt{@proceedings}. Each child entry belonging to this parent entry can
+refer to its \BibTeX\ key using the field \texttt{xref}. This works for entries
+of the type \texttt{@inbook}, \texttt{@incollection} and \texttt{@inproceedings}.
+
+Here is a small example:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@collection{parent,
+ editor = {(*\emph{Editor}*)},
+ title = {(*\emph{Book Title}*)},
+ location = {(*\emph{Location}*)},
+ date = {2008}
+}
+@incollection{child,
+ author = {(*\emph{Author}*)},
+ title = {(*\emph{Title of the Contribution}*)},
+ xref = {parent}% reference
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+When an \texttt{@incollection} entry is cited and the option \option{xref} is set
+to \wert{true}, the cited entry takes data of the entry with
+the \BibTeX\ key \texttt{parent}. If it is available, the \texttt{shorthand}
+is used. Otherwise, the fields \texttt{author}\slash\texttt{editor} and \texttt{title}
+(or \texttt{shorttitle}, if available) are printed. Thus, the reader is
+referred to the corresponding parent entry in the bibliography and in this way
+is provided with all relevant data.
+
+With multiple child entries, it would be possible to have the data entered only
+once (and thus, also the possibility to have typos would be reduced). But you
+have to keep in mind that you then \emph{always} have to use this crossref
+mechanism. If you need a document with all data in every single entry, the corresponding
+information (\texttt{editor}, \texttt{booktitle} etc.) would be missing. It is
+therefore better to enter all relevant data for \texttt{@incollection}, \texttt{@inbook}
+and \texttt{@inproceedings} entries including the \BibTeX{} key of the parent
+entry in the \texttt{xref} field.
+
+The behaviour of the \texttt{xref} field is affected by the package option
+\option{mincrossrefs}, which has the default setting \wert{2}. That means, if only
+one article of a collection is cited, the collection would not be included in the
+bibliography (if it is not cited explicitly) and thus the article would be incomplete.
+For that reason, the option \option{mincrossrefs} is set to \wert{1} when using
+\option{xref=true}.
+
+The default setting does not use this crossref functionality. You can also switch
+it off with \option{xref=false}. In both cases, the \texttt{xref} field takes effect
+only insofar as the parent entry is only included in the bibliography if at least
+two of his child entries are cited (\option{mincrossrefs=2}). You can of course set
+the value for \option{mincrossrefs} to whatever you want or need.
+
+\achtung{}The reference only works with the field \texttt{xref}. The field \texttt{crossref}
+does \emph{not} work together with this crossref functionality! Instead of simply
+copying the missing fields from the parent entry into the child entry, as it is
+done in standard \BibTeX\ and its crossref method, the crossref functionality
+presented here uses a special citation which provides the relevant data of the
+parent entry.
+
+\subsection{Peculiarities}
+\subsubsection{\xbx{footnote-dw} specifics}
+The crossref functionality also works with \xbx{footnote-dw}. When using the option
+\option{xref=true}, citing the parent entry for the first time sets a \cmd{label}
+for the parent entry. It does not matter if the parent entry is cited itself or via
+a child entry. When a (second) child entry is cited, a short citation of the parent
+entry is given along with a reference to the footnote of the first citation in which the
+parent entry appeared.
+
+\subsubsection{Multi-volume \enquote{parents}}
+If a parent enry is a multi-volume work, the child entry normally refers to
+a specific volume of the parent entry, not to the entire work. In order to
+take that into account, \bldw{} checks if the \texttt{volume} field is given
+in the child entry. If so, it checks if the parent entry has a \texttt{volume},
+too. Only if the parent entry has no \texttt{volume} specified, the volume of
+the child entry is printed immediately before the pages.%
+\footnote{The reason why it is not checked if the content of both \texttt{volume}
+fields are the same is the following: As soon as the \texttt{volume} field of
+the parent entry is given, it represents a single volume of a multi-volume work.
+If we now have a child entry with a different \texttt{volume}, it can be considered
+as a fault. At least no scenario came to my mind where a child entry needs a different
+volume as the correpsonding parent entry.} In this case, it will also be checked
+if the data in the \texttt{date} field match. If they don't match (e.g. when the
+multi-volume work was published in several years), the year will be printed
+additionally. Moreover, it will finally be checked if the data in the field
+\texttt{location} (or \texttt{address}) match. If they don't match (e.g. when the
+multi-volume work was published at different places, but the single volume referred to
+by the child entry was published only at one place), the location will be printed
+immediately before the year.
+
+\section{Survey of options}
+\subsection{Global options}
+Global options are valid for all references of a document; they are set
+either as optional arguments when loading \bl{} or in a separate config
+file (\texttt{biblatex.cfg}). The value in parentheses shows the default.
+
+ \optlist{acronyms}{false}
+ Only if set to \wert{true}, the entry option \option{acronym} will be regarded.
+ \optlist[\xbx{authortitle-dw} only]{addyear}{false}
+ If set to \wert{true}, the year of the publication will be set after the title
+ in citations, appearing in parentheses.
+ \optlist{annotation}{false}
+ The field \texttt{annotation} is printed at the end of the bibliography
+ item.
+ \optlist{citeauthor}{namefont}
+ Specifies the font shape of the authors' names when the \cmd{citeauthor}
+ command is used. Possible values are \wert{namefont}, \wert{normalfont} and
+ \wert{namefontfoot}.
+ \optlist{citeauthorname}{normal}
+ Controls the name output when using \cmd{citeauthor} or \cmd{textcite}. With
+ \wert{firstfull} the full name is printed at first citation, at all
+ subsequent citations only the last name is printed. With \wert{full} the full name is
+ always printed, whereas \wert{normal} always gives the given name only.
+ \optlist{citedas}{true}
+ The first citation (in \xbx{authortitle-dw} only if the option
+ \option{firstfull} is used) is followed by the string
+ \enquote{henceforth cited as} whenever a \texttt{shorthand} is given.
+ \optlist{citepages}{separate}
+ Specifies if the pages of a fullcite or of the first citation (\xbx{authortitle-dw}:
+ only with option \option{firstfull}) of an entry with \texttt{pages} field
+ will be printed or not.
+ \optlist{edbyidem}{true}
+ \enquote{ed. by idem} instead of \enquote{ed. by \emph{Editor}}.
+ \optlist{editionstring}{false}
+ Adds the string \enquote{ed.} to the edition, regardless of the content of the
+ \texttt{edition} field.
+ \optlist{editorstring}{parens}
+ Sets the editor string (with \option{usetranslator=true} also the
+ translator string) in parentheses (\wert{parens}) or brackets
+ (\wert{brackets}). If set to \wert{normal}, the editor string is
+ put after the editor's name and preceded by a comma.
+ \optlist{editorstringfont}{normal}
+ The editor\slash translator strings are typeset either in normal font (\wert{normal}) or
+ in the font used by \option{namefont} (\wert{namefont}).
+ \optlist{edstringincitations}{true}
+ In citations, the editor string (with \option{usetranslator=true}
+ also the translator string) is put after the editor's name (and the
+ translator's name, where appropriate).
+ \optlist{edsuper}{false}
+ The edition is printed as superscript number straight ahead of the year.
+ \optlist[\xbx{authortitle-dw} only]{firstfull}{false}
+ The first citation is printed with full reference.
+ \optlist{firstnamefont}{normal}
+ Specifies the font shape of the first names of authors and editors as well
+ as of name affixes and (if \option{useprefix} is set to \wert{false}) of
+ name prefixes. Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic},
+ \wert{bold} and \wert{normal} (which is the default and means that the
+ normal font shape is used).
+ \optlist{ibidemfont}{normal}
+ Specifies the font shape of the \enquote{ibidem} string.
+ Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and
+ \wert{normal} (which is the default and means that the normal font shape
+ is used).
+ \optlist{idembib}{true}
+ \enquote{Idem} or \enquote{---} instead of names for the same
+ authors\slash editors of subsequent entries in the bibliography.
+ \optlist{idembibformat}{idem}
+ Only for \option{idembib=true}: With \wert{idem} the names are substituted
+ by \enquote{Idem}, with \wert{dash} they are substituted by
+ a\,---\,well\,---\,dash (\enquote{---}).
+ \optnur[no default]{idemfont}
+ Specifies the font shape of the \enquote{idem} string.
+ Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and
+ \wert{normal}. If this option is not set, the font shape indicated by the
+ option \option{namefont} is used (this is the default behaviour).
+ \optlist[\xbx{authortitle-dw} only]{inreference}{normal}
+ If set to \wert{full}, \texttt{@inreference} entries are printed in full
+ in the citations, but are omitted from the bibliography.
+ \optlist{journalnumber}{standard}
+ Position of a journal's \texttt{number}: with \wert{standard} as in the
+ standard styles, with \wert{afteryear} after the \texttt{year}, introduced
+ by the bibliography string \enquote{number} (\enquote{no.}), and with
+ \wert{date} dependent on the date settings (see
+ section~\ref{journalnumberdate} on page~\pageref{journalnumberdate}).
+ \optlist{library}{false}
+ The field \texttt{library} is printed at the end of the bibliography item.
+ \optlist{namefont}{normal}
+ Specifies the font shape of the last names of authors and editors as well
+ as of name prefixes (if \option{useprefix} is set to \wert{true}).
+ Possible values are \wert{smallcaps}, \wert{italic}, \wert{bold} and
+ \wert{normal} (which is the default and means that the normal font shape
+ is used).
+ \optlist{nopublisher}{true}
+ The publisher is not printed.
+ \optlist{nolocation}{false}
+ If set to \wert{true}, the location is not printed. In this case, the
+ publisher is omitted, too, even if \option{nopublisher} is set to
+ \wert{false}.
+ \optlist{oldauthor}{true}
+ If set to \wert{false}, the entry options \option{oldauthor} and
+ \option{oldbookauthor} are ignored.
+ \optlist{omiteditor}{false}
+ If set to \wert{true}, the editor is omitted in citations.
+ \optlist{origfields}{true}
+ With \option{origfields=true}, the fields \texttt{origlocation} and
+ \texttt{origdate} (as well as \texttt{origpublisher}, if
+ \option{nopublisher=false} is given) are printed.
+ \optlist{origfieldsformat}{punct}
+ Specifies the appearance of the reprint details (with
+ \option{origfields=true}): in parentheses, in brackets, or introduced by
+ \cmd{origfieldspunct} (preset to a comma).
+ \optlist[\xbx{footnote-dw} only]{pageref}{false}
+ In addition to the footnote number of the first citation, the page number
+ is referenced.
+ \optlist{pagetotal}{false}
+ Whether the field \texttt{pagetotal} is printed or not.
+ \optlist{pseudoauthor}{true}
+ If set to \wert{false}, the author of entries with entry option
+ \option{pseudoauthor} are \emph{not} printed.
+ \optlist{series}{standard}
+ Position of a work's \texttt{series}: with \wert{standard} as in the
+ standard styles, with \wert{afteryear} after the \texttt{year}, with \wert{beforeedition} before the \texttt{edition}.
+ \optlist{seriesformat}{parens}
+ Format of a work's \texttt{series}: with \wert{standard} as in the
+ standard styles, with \wert{parens} in parentheses.
+ \optlist{shorthandibid}{true}
+ Immediately repeated citations of entries with \texttt{shorthand} are
+ replaced by \enquote{ibid.}
+ \optlist{shorthandinbib}{false}
+ If set to \wert{true}, the shorthands will be printed ahead of the bibliography
+ entries.
+ \optnur[no default]{shorthandwidth}
+ Defines the width of the label in the list of shorthands. Additionally,
+ after every label the length \cmd{shorthandsep} (the default is 3pt) and
+ the command \cmd{shorthandpunct} (the default is a colon) are executed.
+ \optlist{shortjournal}{false}
+ With \option{shortjournal=true} the field \texttt{shortjournal} is used
+ instead of \texttt{journaltitle}. If \texttt{shortjournal} is not set,
+ the field \texttt{journaltitle} (and, if available, \texttt{journalsubtitle})
+ is used.
+ \optlist{singletitle}{false}
+ If set to \wert{true}, the title in citations is omitted, unless there is more
+ than one work of the same author. This does not apply to full citations.
+ \optlist{terselos}{true}
+ A terse version of the list of shorthands is used.
+ \optlist{xref}{false}
+ The crossref functionality is used and the option \option{mincrossrefs} is set
+ to \wert{1}. See section~\ref{xreffunctionality} on page~\pageref{xreffunctionality}
+ for details.
+
+\subsection{Entry options}
+Entry options are set in the field \texttt{options} of an entry in the bib file.
+They may override global options for the respective entry.
+ \opt{acronym}
+ The \texttt{shorthands}, with \option{shortjournal=true} also the abbreviated
+ journal titles (\texttt{shortjournal}), are set with the command \cmd{mkbibacro},
+ if the global option \option{acronyms} is set to \wert{true}.
+ \opt{citedas}
+ The string \enquote{henceforth cited as} in first citations
+ (\xbx{authortitle-dw}: with option \option{firstfull} only) of entries
+ with a \texttt{shorthand} is enforced (\wert{true}) or suppressed
+ (\wert{false}).
+ \opt{oldauthor}
+ The \texttt{author} is not set in the font shape chosen by \option{namefont},
+ if the global option \option{oldauthor} is set to \wert{true}.
+ \opt{oldbookauthor}
+ The \texttt{bookauthor} is not set in the font shape chosen by \option{namefont},
+ if the global option \option{oldauthor} is set to \wert{true}.
+ \opt{pseudoauthor}
+ The author is printed between \cmd{bibleftpseudo} and \cmd{bibright\-pseudo},
+ if the global option \option{pseudoauthor} is set to \wert{true}. With the
+ global option \option{pseudoauthor=false}, the author of entries with the
+ entry option \option{pseudoauthor=true} are not printed at all.
+ \opt{shorthandibid}
+ Independent of the global option \option{shorthandibid}, the shorthand of
+ this entry is replaced by \enquote{ibidem} (\wert{true}) or is not
+ replaced (\wert{false}).
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\bl}{biblatex} options}
+The following list shows \bl{} options which are set to a specific value by \bldw{}. You can find more information on these options in the \bl{} documentation.
+
+ \optset{autocite}{footnote}
+ The command \cmd{autocite} is replaced by \cmd{footcite}.
+ \optset{citetracker}{true}
+ The \emph{citation tracker} which checks if a work was already cited before
+ is activated globally.
+ \optset{doi}{false}
+ Whether the field \texttt{doi} is printed or not.
+ \optset{eprint}{false}
+ Whether the field \texttt{eprint} is printed or not.
+ \optset{ibidtracker}{constrict}
+ In immediately repeated citations of the same work, the citation is
+ replaced by \enquote{ibid.}; text and footnotes are treated separately.
+ \optset{idemtracker}{constrict}
+ In immediately repeated citations of the same author, the author's name is
+ replaced by \enquote{idem}; text and footnotes are treated separately.
+ \optset{isbn}{false}
+ Whether the fields \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn} and \texttt{issn} are printed or not.
+ \optset{loccittracker}{false}
+ The \emph{\enquote{loccit} tracker} which checks if the location of a cited
+ work is the same as the location last cited (of the same work) is switched
+ off.
+ \optset{opcittracker}{false}
+ The \emph{\enquote{opcit} tracker} which checks if the work is the same as
+ the one which was last cited by the same author is switched off.
+ \optset{pagetracker}{true}
+ The \emph{page tracker} is switched on; with oneside documents it checks
+ for single pages, with twoside documents it checks for double pages
+ (spreads). The internal tests \cmd{iffirstonpage} and \cmd{ifsamepage}
+ use this option.
+
+\subsection{The option \option{journalnumber=date}}
+\label{journalnumberdate}
+Better than wasting a lot of words in trying to describe the option, I will
+rather give some examples which show the \BibTeX\ entry and the corresponding
+output with \option{journalnumber=date}. The examples were provided by
+Bernhard Tempel; they are in German, but I think the essentials should be
+clear to the English reader as well.
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939a}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a,
+ author = {Gerstmann, Günter},
+ title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus},
+ journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel},
+ date = {2007},
+ volume = {42},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {13},
+ issue = {Januar--März}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Gerstmann:2007a}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{GMG:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{GMG:1939}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950,
+ author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]},
+ title = {Creativity},
+ journal = {The American Psychologist},
+ date = {1950-09},
+ volume = {5},
+ number = {9},
+ pages = {444--454}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Guilford:1950}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Page:1997,
+ author = {Page, Penny Booth},
+ title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies},
+ subtitle = {A critical essay},
+ journal = {Addiction},
+ date = {1997},
+ volume = {92},
+ number = {12},
+ pages = {1619-1637}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Page:1997}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939b}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939c}
+
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906,
+ author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz},
+ title = {Rausch und Kunst},
+ journal = {Blaubuch},
+ date = {1906},
+ volume = {1},
+ pages = {1726-1730},
+ issue = {4. Quartal},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Ewers:1906}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-19}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939d}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939e}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000,
+ author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.},
+ title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen},
+ journal = {Therapeutische Umschau},
+ date = {2000},
+ volume = {57},
+ pages = {241-245},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Landolt:2000}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930,
+ author = {Chapiro, Joseph},
+ title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}},
+ journal = {Neue Freie Presse},
+ number = {23773},
+ pages = {1-3},
+ issue = {Morgenblatt},
+ date = {1930-11-19},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\foreignlanguage{german}{\fullcite{Chapiro:1930}}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939f}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Barski:2007,
+ author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard},
+ title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick},
+ journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen},
+ date = {2007},
+ number = {119},
+ pages = {62},
+ issue = {IV},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Barski:2007}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Essig:2005,
+ author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard},
+ title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld},
+ subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung},
+ number = {237},
+ pages = {16},
+ date = {2005-10-14},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Essig:2005}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007,
+ author = {Kluwe, Sandra},
+ title = {Furor poeticus},
+ subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik Rilkes und Kafkas},
+ journal = {literaturkritik.de},
+ date = {2007-02},
+ number = {2},
+ url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Kluwe:2007}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006,
+ author = {Burckhardt, Barbara},
+ title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen},
+ subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber},
+ journal = {Theater heute},
+ date = {2006},
+ number = {5},
+ pages = {14-18},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\foreignlanguage{german}{\fullcite{Burckhardt:2006}}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922,
+ author = {Ossietzky, Carl von},
+ title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater},
+ journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung},
+ date = {1922-03-30},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot}
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Ossietzky:1922}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausgabe},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939g}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960,
+ author = {Weiss, Grigorij},
+ title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke},
+ subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ journal = {Sinn und Form},
+ date = {1960},
+ pages = {363--385},
+ issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Weiss:1960}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006,
+ author = {Hofer, Hermann},
+ title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten},
+ subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater},
+ journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten},
+ date = {2006-03-14}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Hofer:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006,
+ author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko},
+ title = {Rose Bernd},
+ journal = {Szene Hamburg},
+ date = {2006-04}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Kammerhoff:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939h}
+
+\section{Commands, bibliography strings, entry types, field formats}
+\subsection{Additional commands}
+The following list shows additional commands introduced by \bldw{}, along with their standard definitions. These commands can be customized with \cmd{renewcommand}.
+
+% \befehl{}{}{}
+ \befehl{annotationfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{itshape}}{Font of the field
+ \texttt{annotation}.}
+ \befehl{bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+ \cmd{ifnum}\cmd{value}\{liststop\}\textgreater 2\%\\
+ \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{finalandcomma}\cmd{fi}\%\\
+ \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{addspace}\cmd{bibstring\{and\}}\cmd{space}}{Final
+ delimiter between names in the bibliography. Compare \bl's
+ \cmd{finalnamedelim}.}
+ \befehlleer{bibleftpseudo}{Punctuation after the author when using
+ \option{pseudoauthor=true}.}
+ \befehl{bibmultinamedelim}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Delimiter between
+ names in the bibliography. Compare \bl's \cmd{multinamedelim}.}
+ \befehl{bibrevsdnamedelim}{\cmd{addspace}}{Additional delimiter between
+ first and second name in the bibliography when the scheme
+ \enquote{Surname, Firstname, Firstname Surname} is given. The comma is not
+ meant! Compare \bl's \cmd{revsdnamedelim}.}
+ \befehlleer{bibrightpseudo}{Punctuation before the author when using
+ \option{pseudoauthor=true}.}
+ \befehl{citefinalnamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Final delimiter between names in
+ citations. Compare \bl's \cmd{finalnamedelim}.}
+ \befehl{citemultinamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Delimiter between names in
+ citations. Compare \bl's \cmd{multinamedelim}.}
+ \befehlleer{citerevsdnamedelim}{Additional delimiter between
+ first and second name in citations when the scheme
+ \enquote{Surname, Firstname, Firstname Surname} is given. The comma is not
+ meant! Compare \bl's \cmd{revsdnamedelim}.}
+ \befehl{journumstring}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}\cmd{bibstring\{number\}}%
+ \cmd{addnbspace}}{Punctuation\slash string ahead of the journal number.}
+ \befehl{jourvolnumsep}{\cmd{adddot}}{Punctuation between journal volume and
+ journal number (with \option{journumafteryear=false}).}
+ \befehl{jourvolstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Punctuation\slash string ahead of the
+ journal volume.}
+ \befehl{libraryfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{sffamily}}{Font of the field
+ \texttt{library}.}
+ \befehl{locationdatepunct}{\cmd{addspace}}{Punctuation between \texttt{location}
+ and year (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) when \option{nopublisher=true} is
+ in use or the publisher is missing.}
+ \befehl{locationpublisherpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation between \texttt{location}
+ and \texttt{publisher} when \option{nopublisher=false} is in use.}
+ \befehl{origfieldspunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation ahead of
+ the reprint, if the options \option{origfields=true} and
+ \option{origfieldsformat=punct} are set.}
+ \befehl{publisherdatepunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation between \texttt{publisher}
+ and year (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) when \option{nopublisher=false} is in use.}
+ \befehlleer{seriespunct}{Punctuation before the \texttt{series}, inside the
+ parentheses.}
+ \befehl{sernumstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Punctuation\slash string between the
+ \texttt{series} and its \texttt{number}.}
+ \befehl{shorthandinbibpunct}{\cmd{addspace}}{Punctuation after a shorthand in the
+ bibliography, if \option{shorthandinbib} is used.}
+ \befehl{shorthandpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}}{Punctuation after a shorthand in the list
+ of shorthands, if \option{shorthandwidth} is used.}
+ \befehl{shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}{Length between the
+ shorthand and its description, if \option{shorthandwidth} is used.}
+ \befehl{textcitesdelim}{\cmd{addspace}\cmd{bibstring\{and\}}\cmd{space}}{Delimiter between
+ multiple authors when using \cmd{textcites}.}
+ \befehl{titleaddonpunct}{\cmd{addperiod}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation ahead of
+ \texttt{titleaddon}, \texttt{booktitleaddon} and
+ \texttt{maintitle\-addon}.}
+ \befehl{titleyeardelim}{\cmd{addspace}}{Delimiter between
+ \texttt{title} and \texttt{year}, if \option{addyear=true} is set.}
+
+\subsection{Redefined commands}
+The following list shows the commands which are defined by \bl{}
+and redefined by \bldw{}. These commands can be customized with \cmd{renewcommand}.
+ \befehl{labelnamepunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation after names in the bibliography.}
+ \befehl{nametitledelim}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Delimiter between name and title in citations.}
+ \befehl{newunitpunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation after units in the bibliography.}
+ \befehl{subtitlepunct}{\cmd{addperiod}\cmd{space}}{Punctuation between title and subtitle.}
+
+\subsection{Additional bibliography strings}
+The following list shows the additional bibliography strings introduced by \bldw{}.
+There is always a long and a short version. It depends on the \bl{} option \option{abbreviate} which version is used.
+
+\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm}
+ \biblstring{idemdat}{eidem}{eidem}
+ \biblstring{idemdatsf}{eidem}{eidem}
+ \biblstring{idemdatsm}{eidem}{eidem}
+ \biblstring{idemdatsn}{eidem}{eidem}
+ \biblstring{idemdatpf}{eisdem}{eisdem}
+ \biblstring{idemdatpm}{eisdem}{eisdem}
+ \biblstring{idemdatpn}{eisdem}{eisdem}
+ \biblstring{idemdatpp}{eisdem}{eisdem}
+ \biblstring{inrefstring}{article\cmd{addspace}}{art\cmd{adddotspace}}
+\end{labeling}
+The bibliography strings can be redefined as follows (but note that you cannot
+define a long and a short version):
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{%
+ thiscite = {at},
+ inrefstring = {}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\subsection{Redefined bibliography strings}
+The following list shows the bibliography strings which are defined by \bl{}
+and redefined by \bldw{}. There is always a long and a short version.
+It depends on the \bl{} option \option{abbreviate} which version is used.
+\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm}
+% \biblstring{}{}{}
+ \biblstring{thiscite}{here}{here}
+\end{labeling}
+
+\subsection{Entry types}
+The following entry types are used in a different way than in \bl.
+ \eintragstyp{inreference}{Article in an encyclopedia or dictionary}{incollection}
+ \eintragstyp{review}{Review~-- the reviewed work can be referenced with \texttt{xref}}{article}
+
+\subsection{Additional field formats}
+The following list shows additional field formats defined by \bldw{}.
+
+\feldformat{shorthandinbib}{mkbibbrackets\{\#1\}}{Format of the shorthands
+ when using \option{shorthandinbib=true}.}
+
+\section{Further hints}
+The following hints are ideas for advanced users to further customize
+the styles beyond the options that \bldw{} provides.
+
+\subsection{Delimiter between names}
+Other than \bl{}, \bldw\ distinguishes between delimiters that are used in
+citations and delimiters that are used in the bibliography. \bl{} has only
+\cmd{multinamedelim} (between multiple authors), \cmd{finalnamedelim} (before
+the last author) and \cmd{revsdnamedelim} (additional character(s) in
+\enquote{Lastname, Firstname\textbar\ and Firstname2 Lastname2}: the \textbar\
+indicates the place for the \cmd{revsdnamedelim}).
+
+\bldw{}, however, has \cmd{bibmultinamedelim}, \cmd{bib\-final\-name\-delim}
+and \cmd{bibrevsdnamedelim} for the bibliography as well as
+\cmd{citemultinamedelim}, \cmd{citefinalnamedelim} and
+\cmd{citerevsdna\-medelim} for the citations. Furthermore, \cmd{multinamedelim},
+\cmd{finalnamedelim} and \cmd{revsdnamedelim} are used in the list of
+shorthands. Thus, you can achieve different results. The standard definitions
+are as follows:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[commentstyle=]
+\newcommand*{\multinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\finalnamedelim}{%
+ \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+ \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}
+\newcommand*{\revsdnamedelim}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\bibmultinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+ \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+ \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}%
+\newcommand*{\bibrevsdnamedelim}{\addspace}
+
+\newcommand*{\citemultinamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citefinalnamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citerevsdnamedelim}{}
+\end{lstlisting}
+When you have multiple authors, they are separated by a slash (/) in citations,
+but by comma or (before the last author) by \enquote{and} in the bibliography
+and in the list of shorthands. The definitions for the bibliography and for
+the list of shorthands are the same as with standard \bl{}. You can customize
+these definitions with \cmd{renewcommand*}.
+
+\subsection{Appearance of Shorthands (\cmd{mkbibacro})}
+\label{mkbibacro-anpassen}
+
+In \bl{}, acronyms (e.g. \enquote{\textsc{URL}}) are set in small caps.
+It uses the command \cmd{mkbibacro} which is defined as:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\newcommand*{\mkbibacro}[1]{%
+ \ifcsundef{\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series/sc}
+ {#1}
+ {\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+That means: If small caps are available in the used font, acronyms are set
+in small caps, otherwise in normal shape.
+
+Typographically, it is better (at least in my view) to use upper case letters
+which are slightly letterspaced and scaled down. The letterspacing can be
+done with the package \paket{microtype} (if \paket{pdftex} or \paket{pdf\/latex}
+are used). The scaling is provided by the package \paket{scalefnt}. Thus, the
+command \cmd{mkbibacro} could be redefined in the following way:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\usepackage{scalefnt}
+\usepackage{microtype}
+\renewcommand{\mkbibacro}[1]{%
+ \textls[55]{\scalefont{0.95}#1}\isdot}
+\end{lstlisting}
+The values for \cmd{textls} and \cmd{scalefont} can of course be customized to
+your desires or needs.
+
+If a \texttt{shorthand} is an acronym (e.g.\ \enquote{EB} for \emph{Encyclopædia Britannica}),
+you can add \texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym=true\}} to the entry and use the global
+option \option{acronyms=true}. Then the shorthand will be typeset using the
+command \cmd{mkbibacro}. The same applies to abbreviated journals (e.g.
+\enquote{PP} for \emph{Past and Present}) using the field \texttt{shortjournal\,=\,\{PP\}}
+and \texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym=true\}}.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/de-biblatex-dw.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/de-biblatex-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0121beb0eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/de-biblatex-dw.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/de-biblatex-dw.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/de-biblatex-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..02af0f9b2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/de-biblatex-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1506 @@
+%!TEX TS-program = xelatex
+%!TEX encoding = UTF-8 Unicode
+
+% biblatex-dw
+% Copyright (c) Dominik Waßenhoven <domwass(at)web.de>, 2016
+%
+% Diese Datei enthält die deutschsprachige Dokumentation von biblatex-dw
+
+\documentclass[ngerman]{scrartcl}
+\input{biblatex-dw-preamble}% Präambel
+%\input{biblatex-dw-print}% Druckversion
+\input{biblatex-dw-screen}% Bildschirmversion
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Anfang des Dokuments %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+
+\abstract{\noindent \bldw{} ist eine kleine Sammlung von Zitierstilen
+ für das Paket \bl{} von Philipp Lehman. Sie ist gedacht zum
+ Zitieren und Bibliographieren im geisteswissenschaftlichen Bereich
+ und bietet dafür einige Funktionen, die über die Standardfunktionen
+ von \bl{} hinausgehen. \bldw{} baut vollständig auf
+ \bl{} auf~-- die Version~\biblatexdwversion{}
+ \Mindestanforderung{}\Testversion. Bitte achten Sie auch auf die
+ Mindestanforderungen von \bl{} selbst.}
+
+\lizenz
+\screenversion
+\TOC
+
+\section{Einleitung}
+\subsection{Installation}
+\bldw{} ist in den Distributionen MiK\TeX{}\footnote{Webseite: \url{http://www.miktex.org}.}
+und \TeX{}~Live\footnote{Webseite: \url{http://www.tug.org/texlive}.} enthalten und
+kann mit deren Paketmanagern bequem installiert werden. Wenn Sie stattdessen eine
+manuelle Installation durchführen, so gehen Sie wie folgt vor:
+Entpacken Sie die Datei \texttt{biblatex-dw.tds.zip} in den \texttt{\$LOCALTEXMF}"=Ordner ihres
+Systems.\footnote{Falls Sie nicht wissen, was das ist, können Sie sich unter
+\url{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/TDS} bzw.
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/tds/tds.html} informieren.} Aktualisieren Sie
+anschließend die \emph{filename database} ihrer \TeX"=Distribution.
+Weitere Informationen:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \small
+ \item \url{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/PaketInstallation}
+ \item \url{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/Verschiedenes#67}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Benutzung}
+Die hier angebotenen Zitierstile werden wie die Standard-Stile
+beim Laden des Pakets \bl{} eingebunden:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\usepackage[style=authortitle-dw]{biblatex}
+\end{lstlisting}
+bzw.
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\usepackage[style=footnote-dw]{biblatex}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Die Stile sind so konstruiert, dass sie stark miteinander verschränkt sind.
+Das bedeutet, dass die Kombination eines \bldw"=Stiles mit einem anderen Stil
+nicht unbedingt möglich sein wird.
+Für einen ersten Überblick über die Stile stehen die Beispiele \enquote{de-authortitle-dw}
+und \enquote{de-footnote-dw} im Ordner \texttt{examples} zur Verfügung.
+
+\subsection{Globale Optionen und Eintragsoptionen}
+Die Optionen, die \bl{} zur Verfügung stellt, können auch mit \bldw{} verwendet
+werden. Die von den \bldw"=Stilen zusätzlich bereitgestellten Optionen
+werden im Folgenden erläutert. Dabei ist grundsätzlich zu unterscheiden
+zwischen globalen Optionen und Eintragsoptionen: Globale Optionen gelten für alle
+Literaturverweise im Dokument; sie werden entweder als Option beim Laden von \bl{}
+oder in einer Konfigurationsdatei (\texttt{biblatex.cfg}) gesetzt. Eintragsoptionen
+werden für jeden einzelnen Eintrag im Feld \texttt{options} gesetzt. Manche der
+Eintragsoptionen überschreiben für den jeweiligen Eintrag eventuell gesetzte globale Optionen.
+
+\subsection{Fragen und Antworten (FAQ)}
+In der deutschen \TeX"=FAQ, die auf den Internetseiten der Deutschen Anwendervereinigung
+\TeX\ e.\,V. (\DANTE) eingesehen werden kann, sind auch einige häufig gestellte Fragen
+zu \bl{} und \bldw{} beantwortet, abzurufen unter folgender Adresse:\\
+\href{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/LiteraturverzeichnisMitBiblatex}%
+ {http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/LiteraturverzeichnisMitBiblatex}
+
+Außerdem habe ich für \enquote{\DTK}, die Mitgliederzeitschrift
+von \DANTE, einen einführenden Artikel zu \bl{} geschrieben, den ich auch als PDF
+zum Herunterladen anbiete:\\
+\href{http://biblatex.dominik-wassenhoven.de/dtk.shtml}%
+ {http://biblatex.dominik-wassenhoven.de/dtk.shtml}
+
+\subsection{Entwicklung}
+\bldw{} wird quelloffen entwickelt und bei \href{http://sourceforge.net}{sourceforge.net} gehostet. Der Code (auch der jeweils aktuellen, noch nicht veröffentlichten Version) steht zum Download zur Verfügung.\footnote{\url{http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/code}.} Auf sourceforge.net gibt es auch die Möglichkeit, Fehler zu melden und Verbesserungsvorschläge zu machen. Wenn Sie einen Fehler finden, erstellen Sie bitte einen Bug-Report (am besten inklusive Minimalbeispiel).\footnote{\url{http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Bugs}.} Für Verbesserungsvorschläge verwenden Sie ein Feature-Request.\footnote{\url{http://sourceforge.net/p/biblatex-dw/tickets/milestone/Features}.}
+
+\section{Der Stil \xbx{authortitle-dw}}
+
+Dieser Stil basiert auf dem Standardstil \xbx{authortitle}.
+Neben einigen Änderungen in der Zeichensetzung gibt es folgende Unterschiede:
+
+\subsection{Bibliographie}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Die\beschreibung{namefont}
+ Schriftart der Autoren und Herausgeber kann mit den Optionen%
+ \beschreibung{firstnamefont}
+ \option{namefont} und \option{firstnamefont} auf \wert{normal},
+ \wert{smallcaps}
+ (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursive Schrift) oder \wert{bold}
+ (fetter Schnitt) eingestellt werden.
+ Wenn die Option \option{useprefix=true} gesetzt ist, wirkt sich
+ \option{namefont} auch auf das Namenspräfix aus (also \enquote{von},
+ \enquote{de} etc.).
+ Mit \option{useprefix=false} (der Standardeinstellung) hängt das
+ Namenspräfix von der Option \option{firstnamefont} ab, die in jedem
+ Fall
+ das Namenssuffix (den \enquote{Junior}"=Teil) beeinflusst.
+ \item Wird\beschreibung{oldauthor}
+ die Option \option{namefont} benutzt, aber es sollen dennoch
+ einige Namen nicht in der gewählten Schriftform gesetzt werden (z.\,B.
+ mittelalterliche oder antike Autoren), kann im entsprechenden
+ Eintrag der bib-Datei das Feld \texttt{options\,=\,\{oldauthor=true\}}
+ oder \texttt{options\,=\,\{oldauthor\}} gesetzt werden. Sollen diese
+ mit \texttt{oldauthor} gekennzeichneten Einträge in derselben Schrift
+ gesetzt werden wie die anderen Einträge, kann man die Eintragsoption
+ mit der globalen Option \option{oldauthor=false} überschreiben.
+ \item Es\beschreibung{oldbookauthor} gibt auch die Eintragsoption \option{oldbookauthor},
+ die dieselbe Funktionalität wie \option{oldauthor} für das Feld \texttt{bookauthor}
+ bereitstellt. Dies ist nützlich für \texttt{@inbook}"=Einträge, die beispielsweise
+ eine Einleitung zur Edition eines Werkes bieten, dessen Autor nicht in der normalen
+ Schrift gesetzt werden soll. Diese Option lässt sich mit der globalen Option
+ \option{oldauthor=false} ausschalten.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{idemfont}
+ Schriftart von \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} (siehe unten)
+ kann mit der Option \option{idemfont} auf \wert{normal},
+ \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursive Schrift) oder
+ \wert{bold} (fetter Schnitt) eingestellt werden. Wird die Option nicht
+ verwendet, so wird der Schriftschnitt der Option \option{namefont}
+ benutzt. Das ist auch das Standardverhalten.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{ibidemfont}
+ Schriftart von \enquote{ebenda}\slash\enquote{ebd.} (siehe unten)
+ kann mit der Option \option{ibidemfont} auf \wert{normal},
+ \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursive Schrift) oder
+ \wert{bold} (fetter Schnitt) eingestellt werden. Der Standard ist
+ \wert{normal}.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{acronyms}
+ Siglen (\texttt{shorthand} und \texttt{shortjournal}) können mit
+ dem\beschreibung{acronym}
+ Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} gesetzt werden (Standard für diesen Befehl:
+ \textsc{smallcaps}). Dazu setzt man die globale Option \option{acronyms=true}
+ \emph{und} im entsprechenden Eintrag der bib-Datei das Feld
+ \texttt{options = \{acronym=true\}}. Zur Anpassung des Befehls
+ \cmd{mkbibacro} siehe auch den Abschnitt \enquote{\nameref{mkbibacro-anpassen}}
+ (S.~\pageref{mkbibacro-anpassen}).
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{idembib}
+ der Option \option{idembib} können aufeinanderfolgende Einträge
+ desselben Autors\slash{}Herausgebers in der Bibliographie durch
+ \enquote{Ders.} bzw. \enquote{Dies.} oder durch einen langen Strich
+ (---) ersetzt werden. Setzt man die Option auf \wert{false}, werden
+ die Namen auch in aufeinanderfolgenden Einträgen gleicher Autoren\slash
+ Herausgeber ausgegeben. Mit \option{idembib=true} wird die Ersetzung
+ eingeschaltet. Das Format lässt sich dann durch die Option\beschreibung{idembibformat}
+ \option{idembibformat} einstellen; sie kann die Werte \wert{idem}
+ (\enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.}) und \wert{dash} (---) annehmen.
+ Das Geschlecht, das bei der Verwendung von \wert{idem} in manchen
+ Sprachen
+ wichtig ist, wird im Feld \texttt{gender} festgelegt (siehe dazu die
+ \bl"=Dokumentation). Der Standard für \option{idembib} ist
+ \wert{true},
+ der Standard für \option{idembibformat} ist \wert{idem}.
+ \item Wenn\beschreibung{edbyidem}
+ Autor und Herausgeber bei \texttt{@inbook}"~, \texttt{@incollection}"~ oder
+ \texttt{@inreference}"=Einträgen dieselben sind, werden ihre Namen nicht
+ wiederholt, sondern durch \enquote{hg.\,v.\,ders.},
+ \enquote{hg.\,v.\,dems.} etc. ersetzt. Das Geschlecht wird im Feld
+ \texttt{gender} festgelegt (siehe dazu die \bl{}"=Dokumentation).
+ Diese Funktion wird durch die Option \option{edbyidem} kontrolliert,
+ die die Werte \wert{true} oder \wert{false} annehmen kann;
+ der Standard ist \wert{true}.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{editorstring}
+ Option \option{editorstring} kann die Werte \wert{parens},
+ \wert{brackets} und \wert{normal} annehmen; der Standard ist
+ \wert{parens}. Diese Option setzt den Ausdruck \enquote{Herausgeber}
+ (abgekürzt \enquote{Hrsg.}) in runde Klammern (parens) oder in eckige
+ Klammern (brackets). Wenn die Option den Wert \wert{normal} hat, wird
+ der Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} nicht von Klammern umgeben. Stattdessen
+ wird er an den Namen des Herausgebers und ein anschließendes Komma
+ angehängt.
+ Bei Verwendung von \option{usetranslator=true} trifft die Einstellung
+ von \option{editorstring} auch auf den Ausdruck \enquote{Übersetzer}
+ (abgekürzt \enquote{Übers.}) zu.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{editorstringfont} Option \option{editorstringfont}
+ bestimmt die Schriftart, die für den Ausdruck \enquote{Herausgeber}
+ (abgekürzt \enquote{Hrsg.}) benutzt wird. Mit \wert{normal} wird die
+ Standardschrift des Dokuments benutzt, \wert{namefont} übernimmt die
+ Einstellung der Option \option{namefont}.
+ Bei Verwendung von \option{usetranslator=true} trifft die Einstellung
+ von \option{editorstringfont} auch auf den Ausdruck \enquote{Übersetzer}
+ (abgekürzt \enquote{Übers.}) zu. Der Standard für diese Option
+ ist \wert{normal}.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{pseudoauthor}
+ der Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor} kann man Autorennamen
+ in eckige Klammern einschließen oder ganz unterdrücken. Das ist beispielsweise nützlich für
+ Editionen von Werken, deren Autoren nicht genannt werden, aber bekannt
+ sind. Wenn die globale Option \option{pseudoauthor} auf \wert{true} gesetzt
+ (und die Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor} benutzt) wird, dann wird der
+ Autor ausgegeben. Dabei wird er von den Befehlen \cmd{bibleftpseudo} und \cmd{bibrightpseudo}
+ eingerahmt. Diese Befehle sind standardmäßig leer. Wenn man den Autor beispielsweise in eckigen
+ Klammern haben möchte, muss man die Befehle umdefinieren:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{\bibleftbracket}
+\renewcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{\bibrightbracket}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ Wenn die globale Option \option{pseudoauthor} auf \wert{false} gesetzt wird, werden Autoren
+ von Einträge mit der Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor} gar nicht ausgegeben. Der Standard für
+ die globale Option ist \wert{true}.
+ \item In\beschreibung{nopublisher}
+ der Standardeinstellung wird der Verlag (\texttt{publisher}) nicht
+ ausgegeben, sondern nur Ort (\texttt{location}) und Jahr
+ (\texttt{date}). Will man den Verlag ausgeben, muss man die Option
+ \option{nopublisher=false} setzen.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{nolocation}
+ \option{nolocation=true} kann man auch die Ausgabe des Ortes
+ unterdrücken. In diesem Fall wird auch der Verlag nicht ausgegeben
+ (unabhängig von der
+ Einstellung von \option{nopublisher}). Der Standard ist \wert{false}.
+ \item Die Felder \texttt{doi}, \texttt{eprint}, \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn},
+ \texttt{issn}\beschreibung{pagetotal} und \texttt{pagetotal} werden mit den Standardeinstellungen
+ nicht ausgegeben. Sie können aber mit den Optionen \option{doi=true},
+ \option{eprint=true}, \option{isbn=true} (gilt auch für \texttt{isrn}
+ und \texttt{issn}) bzw. \option{pagetotal=true} berücksichtigt werden.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{origfields}
+ der Option \option{origfields} kann man entscheiden, ob man die
+ Felder \texttt{origlocation}, \texttt{origpublisher} und
+ \texttt{origdate} ausgeben lassen möchte oder nicht. Der Standard ist
+ \wert{true}. Wenn die Option genutzt wird und das Feld
+ \texttt{origlocation} gesetzt ist, werden die \enquote{orig}"=Felder
+ ausgegeben. In diesem Fall werden dann die Felder \texttt{location},
+ \texttt{publisher} und \texttt{date} in Klammern angefügt, eingeleitet
+ durch den \emph{bibliography string} \texttt{reprint} (\enquote{Nachdr.} oder
+ \enquote{Nachdruck}). Dabei werden die Felder \texttt{publisher} und
+ \texttt{origpublisher} nur ausgegeben,
+ wenn die Option \option{nopublisher=false} eingestellt ist.
+ \achtung Beachten Sie, dass die Edition eines Werks sich immer auf die
+ ursprüngliche Ausgabe bezieht, da Nachdrucke normalerweise nicht in
+ mehreren Auf"|lagen erscheinen, sondern eine spezifische Auf"|lage
+ erneut veröffentlichen. Wenn die Option \option{edsuper} benutzt wird,
+ erscheint die Auf"|lage also als hochgestellte Zahl vor
+ \texttt{origdate}.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{origfieldsformat}
+ der Option \option{origfieldsformat}, die die Werte \wert{parens},
+ \wert{brackets} und \wert{punct} annehmen kann, lässt sich einstellen,
+ wie die Angaben zum Nachdruck (bei \option{origfields=true}) ausgegeben
+ werden. Mit \wert{parens} oder \wert{brackets} werden sie in runden
+ bzw. eckigen Klammern gesetzt. Der Standard ist \wert{punct}; dabei
+ werden die Angaben durch das Zeichen \cmd{origfieldspunct}
+ eingeleitet, das auf ein Komma voreingestellt ist.
+ \item Die Zeichensetzung vor dem Titelzusatz (\texttt{titleaddon},
+ \texttt{booktitleaddon} und \texttt{maintitleaddon}) wird durch den
+ neuen Befehl \cmd{titleaddonpunct} gesteuert. Der Standard ist ein
+ Punkt.
+ \item Wird\beschreibung{edsuper}
+ die Option \option{edsuper} auf \wert{true} gesetzt, erscheint
+ die Auf"|lage (\texttt{edition}) als hochgestellte Zahl (nicht als
+ Ordnungszahl) direkt vor dem Jahr. Der Standardwert für diese Option
+ ist \wert{false}.\\
+ \achtung Beachten Sie, dass die Option \option{edsuper} nur dann
+ funktioniert,
+ wenn im Feld \texttt{edition} \emph{nur} eine Zahl steht. Angaben wie
+ \enquote{5., aktualisierte und ergänzte Aufl.} werden wie sonst auch
+ normal ausgegeben. Gleichzeitig wird in diesem Fall eine Warnung
+ ausgegeben.
+ Will man von der Option \option{edsuper} Gebrauch machen, wird deshalb
+ dringend geraten, in das Feld \texttt{edition} weiterhin nur Zahlwerte
+ einzugeben und für ausführliche Angaben zu Auf"|lagen das Feld
+ \texttt{note} zu verwenden.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{editionstring} \option{editionstring=true} wird
+ der \emph{bibliography string} \enquote{edition} zur Edition (Feld
+ \texttt{edition}) automatisch hinzugefügt, auch wenn es sich dabei
+ nicht um eine Zahl handelt. Man kann also beispielsweise in der bib-Datei
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+edition = {2., aktualisierte}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ schreiben und erhält \enquote{2., aktualisierte Aufl.}
+ Setzt man die Option auf \wert{false}, wird nur dann der \emph{bibliography string}
+ hinzugefügt, wenn in \texttt{edition} nur eine Zahl angegeben wird
+ (\bl"=Standard"=Verhalten).
+ Der Standard für diese Option ist \wert{false}.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{shortjournal}
+ der Option \option{shortjournal=true} wird statt \texttt{journaltitle}
+ das Feld \texttt{shortjournal} verwendet. Das ist sehr nützlich für
+ Zeitschriftensiglen, die man bei Bedarf einsetzen kann.
+ \item Fehlt bei Zeitschriften die Bandangabe (\texttt{volume}), wird die
+ Jahreszahl \emph{nicht} in Klammern gesetzt:
+ \enquote{Zeitschriftenname 2008}. Falls dagegen das Feld \texttt{month}
+ gesetzt ist (oder das Feld \texttt{date} den entsprechenden Inhalt aufweist, z.\,B.
+ \texttt{2008-03}), wird das Datum vom Zeitschriftennamen durch ein
+ zusätzliches Komma getrennt.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{journalnumber}
+ der Option \option{journalnumber} lässt sich die Position der
+ Heftnummer (\texttt{number}) bei Zeitschriften variieren. Mit dem
+ Wert \wert{afteryear} wird sie nach dem Jahr
+ ausgegeben, eingeleitet durch den Befehl \cmd{journumstring} (siehe
+ unten), also \enquote{Zeitschriftenname 28 (2008), Nr.~2}. Setzt man
+ die Option auf \wert{standard}, wird das Standardverhalten
+ wiederhergestellt, wobei das Zeichen zwischen \texttt{volume} und
+ \texttt{number} mit dem neuen Befehl \cmd{jourvolnumsep}
+ (Standard: \cmd{adddot}) einstellbar ist. Zusätzlich gibt es noch
+ die Möglichkeit, \option{journalnumber} auf \wert{date} zu setzen.
+ Damit wird gewährleistet, dass das Datum auch dann ausgegeben wird,
+ wenn das Feld \texttt{issue} definiert ist (das ist in den
+ Standard"=Stilen nicht der Fall). Außerdem wird die Heftnummer vor
+ dem Datum ausgegeben, wenn zumindest Jahr (\texttt{year}) und Monat
+ (\texttt{month}) angegeben sind (\texttt{date = \{YYYY-MM\}} ist natürlich
+ ebenfalls möglich). Wenn nur das Jahr gegeben ist,
+ wird die Heftnummer nach dem Jahr ausgegeben. Für nähere Einzelheiten
+ zur Option \option{journalnumber=date} siehe
+ Abschnitt~\ref{journalnumberdate} auf
+ Seite~\pageref{journalnumberdate}. Der Standard für
+ \option{journalnumber} ist \wert{true}.
+ \item Mit dem neuen Befehl \cmd{journumstring} wird die Heftnummer von
+ Zeitschriften eingeleitet. Der Standard ist \wert{, Nr.~}. Der
+ Befehl kann leicht an die eigenen Bedürfnisse angepasst werden,
+ z.\,B.:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\journumstring}{\addspace}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item Mit dem neuen Befehl \cmd{jourvolstring} wird die Bandnummer von
+ Zeitschriften eingeleitet. Der Standard ist ein Leerzeichen. Der
+ Befehl kann leicht an die eigenen Bedürfnisse angepasst werden,
+ z.\,B.:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\jourvolstring}{%
+ \addspace Jg\adddot\space}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item Die\beschreibung{series}
+ Option \option{series} bestimmt die Position der Reihe (Feld
+ \texttt{series}), möglich sind die Werte \wert{afteryear}, \wert{beforeedition} und \wert{standard}. Das betrifft die Typen \texttt{@book},
+ \texttt{@inbook}, \texttt{@collection}, \texttt{@incollection},
+ \texttt{@proceedings}, \texttt{@inproceedings} und \texttt{@manual}. Bei \wert{afteryear} wird die Reihe nach dem Jahr ausgegeben, bei \wert{beforeedition} vor der Auf"|lage.
+ Der Standardwert für diese Option ist \wert{standard}, die Reihe wird dann vor dem Ort ausgegeben.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{seriesformat} Option \option{seriesformat} kann
+ die Werte \wert{standard} und \wert{parens} annehmen. Mit
+ \wert{parens} werden Reihe und Nummer eines Werkes (\texttt{series} und
+ \texttt{number}) von Klammern umgeben, ansonsten ohne Klammern (wie es
+ in den Standard"=Stilen der Fall ist). Der Standard für diese Option ist
+ \wert{parens}.
+ \item Der Befehl \cmd{seriespunct} bestimmt die Zeichensetzung vor dem
+ Reihentitel (Feld \texttt{series}). Bei \option{seriesformat=parens}
+ wird das Zeichen innerhalb der Klammer gesetzt.
+ Es kann z.\,B. auf \wert{=\cmd{addspace}} eingestellt
+ werden, was in manchen Fächern üblich ist. Standardmäßig ist dieser
+ Befehl leer, d.\,h. der Reihentitel wird direkt nach der öffnenden
+ runden Klammer gesetzt.
+ \item Der Befehl \cmd{sernumstring} bestimmt die Zeichensetzung zwischen dem
+ Reihentitel (Feld \texttt{series}) und der dazugehörigen Nummer (Feld
+ \texttt{number}). Der Standardwert ist \wert{\cmd{addspace}}. Er kann
+ leicht angepasst werden, z.\,B.:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\sernumstring}{%
+ \addcomma\space\bibstring{volume}\addspace}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ Das würde \enquote{(Reihentitel, Bd. N)} ergeben.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{shorthandinbib} der Option \option{shorthandinbib}
+ lassen sich die Siglen (\texttt{shorthand}) im Literaturverzeichnis
+ ausgeben. Mit \option{shorthandinbib=true} werden sie direkt vor dem
+ entsprechenden Eintrag in eckigen Klammern ausgegeben. Das Erscheinungsbild
+ wird durch das Feldformat \enquote{shorthandinbib} festgelegt. Will man
+ die Klammern weglassen, definiert man das Feldformat folgendermaßen:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandinbib}{#1}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ Da in diesem Fall nur ein Leerzeichen zwischen Sigle und Literatureintrag
+ steht, sollte man auch die Zeichensetzung nach der Sigle umdefinieren. Dafür
+ ist der Befehl \cmd{shorthandinbibpunct} zuständig, dem man etwa ein
+ Gleichheitszeichen zuweisen könnte; dabei sollte man aber \cmd{nopunct}
+ verwenden, um überflüssige Zeichen nach der Sigle zu vermeiden:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand*{\shorthandinbibpunct}{%
+ \addspace=\nopunct\addspace}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item Setzt\beschreibung{annotation}
+ man die Option \option{annotation} auf
+ \wert{true}, wird das Feld \texttt{annotation} in
+ \textit{\small kleiner kursiver} Schrift am Ende des Eintrags
+ ausgegeben. Der Standardwert für diese Option ist \wert{false}.
+ Das Erscheinungsbild kann mit dem folgenden Befehl angepasst werden:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\annotationfont}{\small\itshape}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item Setzt\beschreibung{library}
+ man die Option \option{library} auf
+ \wert{true}, wird das Feld \texttt{library} in
+ {\small\sffamily kleiner serifenloser} Schrift am Ende des Eintrags
+ ausgegeben. Der Standardwert für diese Option ist \wert{false}.
+ Das Erscheinungsbild kann mit dem folgenden Befehl angepasst werden:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\libraryfont}{\small\sffamily}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ \item Werden sowohl \option{annotation} als auch \option{library} auf
+ \wert{true} gesetzt, so wird der Inhalt des Feldes \texttt{annotation}
+ vor dem Inhalt des \texttt{library}-Feldes ausgegeben.
+ \item In\beschreibung{@inreference}
+ \bl{} ist der Eintragstyp \texttt{@inreference} ein Alias für
+ \texttt{@incollection}. In \bldw{} kann dieser Eintragstyp für
+ Artikel in Nachschlagewerken verwendet werden. Die Ausgabe ist ähnlich
+ wie bei \texttt{@incollection}, aber es gibt ein paar Unterschiede:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Der Titel wird in Anführungszeichen gesetzt.
+ \item Der \textit{bibliography string} \enquote{inrefstring} (Standard:
+ \enquote{Artikel}\slash\enquote{Art.}) wird vor dem Titel ausgegeben.
+ \item Der Ort (Feld \texttt{location}) wird nicht ausgegeben.
+ \item Gibt es eine Bandangabe (Feld \texttt{volume}), so sieht die Ausgabe
+ z.\,B. folgendermaßen aus: \enquote{in: Lexikon 2 (1990), S. 120.}
+ \end{itemize}
+ Der Eintragstyp \texttt{@reference} bleibt ein Alias zu \texttt{@collection}.
+ Damit kann also sowohl \texttt{@collection} als auch \texttt{@reference} für
+ Nachschlagewerke (Lexika, Wörterbücher etc.) verwendet werden.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{inreference} der Option \option{inreference=full} werden
+ \texttt{@inreference}"=Einträge in Literaturverweisen immer vollständig ausgegeben,
+ dafür aber nicht in die Bibliographie aufgenommen. Beachten Sie, dass bei Benutzung
+ der Option \option{xref=false} der korrespondierende \texttt{@reference}"=Eintrag
+ manuell zitiert werden muss (z.\,B. mit \cmd{nocite}), wenn er in der Bibliographie
+ erscheinen soll. Die Option \option{inreference} befolgt die Einstellungen sowohl
+ von \option{ibidtracker} als auch \option{idemtracker}. Der Standardwert für diese
+ Option ist \wert{normal}.
+ \item In\beschreibung{@review}
+ \bl{} ist der Eintragstyp \texttt{@review} ein Alias für
+ \texttt{@article}. In \bldw{} kann dieser Eintragstyp für
+ Rezensionen verwendet werden. Die Ausgabe ist ähnlich wie bei
+ \texttt{@article}, mit folgenden Unterschieden:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Der Titel wird in Anführungszeichen gesetzt.
+ \item Der \emph{bibliography string} \enquote{reviewof} (Standard:
+ \enquote{Rezension zu}\slash\enquote{Rez. zu}) wird vor dem
+ Titel ausgegeben.
+ \item Statt einer manuellen Angabe des rezensierten Werkes im \texttt{title}"=Feld
+ des \texttt{@review}"=Eintrags kann man auch einen Verweis im Feld
+ \texttt{xref} machen. Der Eintrag mit dem dort angegebenen \BibTeX"=Key
+ wird dann zitiert. Diese Vorgehensweise hat den Vorteil, das Einstellungen
+ wie \option{namefont} oder \option{firstfull} auch für das rezensierte Werk
+ gelten.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Zitate im Text}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Folgen zwei unterschiedliche Zitate desselben Autors\slash
+ Heraus\-gebers direkt aufeinander, wird der Name im zweiten Zitat durch
+ \enquote{Ders.} oder \enquote{Dies.} ersetzt, sofern das Zitat nicht
+ das erste der aktuellen Seite ist. Das Geschlecht wird im Feld
+ \texttt{gender} festgelegt (siehe dazu die \bl"=Dokumentation).
+ Diese Funktion wird durch die \bl"=Option \option{idemtracker}
+ kontrolliert, die auf \wert{constrict} gesetzt ist. Wer sie abschalten
+ möchte, verwendet \option{idemtracker=false}. Für weitere Informationen
+ zu dieser Option wird auf die \bl"=Dokumentation verwiesen.
+ \item Direkt aufeinanderfolgende Zitate werden durch \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt,
+ sofern das Zitat nicht das erste der aktuellen Seite ist.
+ Dieses Verhalten lässt sich mit der \bl{}"=Option \option{ibidtracker}
+ unterdrücken. In diesem Fall bleibt die \enquote{idem}-Funktionalität
+ erhalten, solange nicht die Option \option{idemtracker} auf \wert{false}
+ gesetzt wird.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{shorthandibid}
+ Option \option{shorthandibid} kontrolliert, ob direkt
+ aufeinanderfolgende Zitate mit einer Sigle (\texttt{shorthand})
+ ebenfalls durch \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt werden sollen oder nicht.
+ Mögliche Werte für diese Option sind \wert{true} und \wert{false},
+ der Standard ist \wert{true}. Diese Option hat keinerlei Effekt,
+ wenn die Option \option{ibidtracker} auf \wert{false} gesetzt wird.\\
+ Diese Funktion kann auch für jeden Eintrag separat eingestellt werden
+ mit \texttt{options\,=\,\{short""hand""ibid=""true\}} oder
+ \texttt{options\,=\,\{short""hand""ibid""=false\}}. Die globale
+ Einstellung wird dann für den entsprechenden Eintrag ignoriert.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{addyear} der Option \option{addyear} wird das Jahr
+ der Publikation nach dem Titel angefügt. Das Jahr erscheint dabei in
+ Klammern. Der Standard für diese Option ist \wert{false}.
+ \item Wenn\beschreibung{omiteditor}
+ man die Option \option{useeditor} auf \wert{false} setzt, kann man
+ mit \option{omiteditor=true} erreichen, dass der Herausgeber in
+ Literaturverweisen unterdrückt wird. Dasselbe gilt auch für Kurzverweise
+ in der Bibliographie, sofern man \option{xref=true} verwendet.
+ Mit \option{useeditor=true} hat die Option \option{omiteditor} keine
+ Auswirkung. Der Standard für diese Option ist \wert{false}.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung[edstringincitations]{edstring\-incitations}
+ der Option \option{edstringincitations=true} werden Herausgeber
+ (\texttt{edi\-tor}) und Übersetzer (\texttt{translator}) bei jedem
+ Literaturverweis mit den entsprechenden Kürzeln versehen, nicht nur
+ bei Vollzitaten. Das Erscheinungsbild richtet sich dabei nach der
+ Einstellung der Option \option{editorstring}. Der Standardwert für
+ diese Option ist \wert{true}.
+ \item Wenn der Befehl \cmd{textcite} mit einem Eintrag benutzt wird, der
+ weder einen Autor (\texttt{author}) noch einen Herausgeber (\texttt{editor})
+ hat, gibt \bl{} eine Warnung aus und setzt den \BibTeX{}-Key des
+ Eintrags in fetter Schrift in den Text.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{firstfull}
+ der Option \option{firstfull} kann man für das erste Zitat die
+ volle Literaturangabe ausgeben lassen. Der Standard für diese Option ist
+ \wert{false}.
+ \item Wenn\beschreibung{citedas}
+ es eine Sigle (\texttt{shorthand}) gibt, wird bei \option{firstfull=true}
+ dem Erstzitat der Zusatz \enquote{im Folgenden zit. als~\ldots} angefügt.
+ Dies kann durch die Option \option{citedas} beeinflusst werden.
+ Sie kann die Werte \wert{true} oder \wert{false} annehmen;
+ der Standard ist \wert{true}.
+ Diese Funktion kann auch für jeden Eintrag separat eingestellt werden mit
+ \texttt{options\,=\,\{citedas=true\}} oder
+ \texttt{options\,=\,\{citedas=false\}}. Die globale Einstellung
+ wird dann für den entsprechenden Eintrag ignoriert.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{citepages}
+ der Option \option{citepages} lassen sich die Seitenangaben in Vollzitaten
+ unterdrücken, wenn das Feld \texttt{pages} vorhanden ist:
+ \option{citepages=permit} erlaubt Duplikate, d.\,h. sowohl \texttt{pages}
+ als auch \texttt{postnote} werden ausgegeben;
+ mit \option{citepages=suppress} wird das \texttt{pages}"=Feld des Vollzitats
+ in jedem Fall unterdrückt, es wird also nur die \texttt{postnote} ausgegeben (falls vorhanden);
+ \option{citepages=omit} unterdrückt die Ausgabe von \texttt{pages} nur, wenn
+ in der \texttt{postnote} eine Seitenzahl angegeben ist;
+ \option{citepages=separate} gibt das \texttt{pages}"=Feld immer aus, trennt
+ die \texttt{postnote} aber mit dem Begriff \enquote{hier} ab, falls es sich
+ um eine Seitenzahl handelt. Dazu wird der \emph{bibliography string} \enquote{thiscite}
+ verwendet, der sich natürlich umdefinieren lässt.
+ Der Standard für diese Option ist \wert{separate}.
+ Dazu ein Beispiel, das die folgenden Zitierbefehle verwendet:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\cite{BibTeX-Key}
+\cite[eine Anmerkung]{BibTeX-Key}
+\cite[125]{BibTeX-Key}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ %
+ \option{citepages=permit}:
+ \begin{quote}
+ Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150.
+
+ Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150, eine Anmerkung.
+
+ Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150, S.\,125.
+ \end{quote}
+ %
+ \option{citepages=suppress}:
+ \begin{quote}
+ Autor: Titel, in: Buch.
+
+ Autor: Titel, in: Buch, eine Anmerkung.
+
+ Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,125.
+ \end{quote}
+ %
+ \option{citepages=omit}:
+ \begin{quote}
+ Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150.
+
+ Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150, eine Anmerkung.
+
+ Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,125.
+ \end{quote}
+ %
+ \option{citepages=separate}:
+ \begin{quote}
+ Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150.
+
+ Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150, eine Anmerkung.
+
+ Autor: Titel, in: Buch, S.\,100--150, hier S.\,125.
+ \end{quote}
+ \item Die\beschreibung{citeauthor} Option \option{citeauthor} bestimmt das Format für den
+ Befehl \cmd{citeauthor}; sie kann die Werte \wert{namefont}, \wert{namefontfoot} und
+ \wert{normalfont} annehmen. Mit \option{citeauthor=namefont} wird das Format
+ benutzt, das mit der Option \option{namefont} eingestellt wurde. Dies ist die
+ Standardeinstellung. Mit \option{citeauthor=normalfont} wird immer die normale
+ Schrift für \cmd{citeauthor} benutzt, unabhängig von der Einstellung der Option
+ \option{namefont}. Mit \option{citeauthor=namefontfoot} wird das
+ \option{namefont}"=Format benutzt, wenn der \cmd{citeauthor}"=Befehl in einer
+ Fußnote steht, ansonsten wird die normale Schrift benutzt.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{citeauthorname}
+ der Option \option{citeauthorname} hat man die Möglichkeit, die Namensform
+ beim Zitieren eines Autors\slash Herausgebers mit dem Befehl \cmd{citeauthor}
+ oder mit dem Befehl \cmd{textcite} zu steuern. \option{citeauthorname=firstfull}
+ bewirkt, dass beim ersten Zitieren der volle Name ausgegeben wird und bei allen
+ weiteren Zitaten nur der Nachname. Das funktioniert auch bei unterschiedlichen
+ Literaturverweisen desselben Autors, so dass auch dann der volle Name nur beim
+ ersten Verweis ausgegeben wird. Dabei ist es egal, ob man nur \cmd{citeauthor},
+ nur \cmd{textcite} oder beide Befehle gemischt einsetzt. Mit
+ \option{citeauthorname=full} wird immer der volle Name ausgegeben, mit
+ \option{citeauthorname=normal} wird immer nur der Nachname ausgegeben.
+ Der Standard für diese Option ist \wert{normal}.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{singletitle}
+ der \bl"=Option \option{singletitle=true} wird der Titel eines Werkes
+ nur dann ausgegeben, wenn mehr als ein Werk desselben Autors vorhanden ist.
+ Für weitere Informationen sehen Sie bitte in der \bl"=Dokumentation nach.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection[Sigelverzeichnis]{Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)}}
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Das\beschreibung{terselos}
+ Sigelverzeichnis enthält in der Standardeinstellung lediglich
+ Autor (oder Herausgeber), Titel und gegebenenfalls Buchtitel bzw. bei
+ mehrbändigen Werken den Gesamttitel. Diese Angaben sollten ausreichen,
+ um die vollständigen Daten in der Bibliographie zu finden. Dieses
+ Verhalten wird durch die Option \option{terselos} gesteuert, die
+ die Werte \wert{true} und \wert{false} annehmen kann; der Standard
+ ist \wert{true}.
+ \item Mit\beschreibung{shorthandwidth}
+ der Option \option{shorthandwidth} kann man die Breite der Label
+ im Sigelverzeichnis angeben. Das ist vor allem nützlich, wenn man sehr
+ lange Sigel hat. Die Option kann alle gängigen Längenwerte annehmen,
+ also beispielsweise \wert{40pt} oder \wert{3em}. \achtung Wenn man die
+ Option \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt, wird der Abstand nach dem Label
+ reduziert und gleichzeitig ein Doppelpunkt nach dem Label angefügt.
+ Das Trennzeichen lässt sich durch den Befehl \cmd{shorthandpunct}
+ umdefinieren, der Abstand wird durch die neue Länge \cmd{shorthandsep}
+ festgelegt. Die Standardwerte (sobald \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt
+ wird) sind:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+\renewcommand{\shorthandpunct}{\addcolon}
+\setlength{\shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}
+ \end{lstlisting}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Der Stil \xbx{footnote-dw}}
+
+Dieser Stil ähnelt dem Stil \xbx{verbose-inote}. Er basiert auf
+\xbx{authortitle-dw}, so dass auch alle Optionen, die von \xbx{authortitle-dw} definiert
+werden, mit \xbx{footnote-dw} benutzt werden können, mit Ausnahme der Optionen
+\option{addyear}, \option{firstfull} und \option{inreference}. Daneben gibt es folgende
+Unterschiede:
+\medskip
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Zitate sind \emph{nur} innerhalb von Fußnoten möglich. Zitate
+ außerhalb von Fußnoten werden automatisch zu einem \cmd{footcite}
+ geändert. Einzige Ausnahme ist \cmd{textcite}, das im Text den
+ Namen und ein Zitat in der Fußnote ausgibt; verwendet man
+ \cmd{textcite} in einer Fußnote, wird der Name ausgegeben und
+ das Zitat in Klammern dahinter gesetzt.
+ \item Das erste Zitat eines Eintrags gibt die volle Literaturangabe aus,
+ alle weiteren Zitate desselben Eintrags werden nur durch den
+ Autor (\texttt{author}) und den Kurztitel (\texttt{shorttitle})
+ repräsentiert, bzw. durch den Titel (\texttt{title}), falls kein
+ Kurztitel definiert wurde. Ergänzt wird die Angabe durch den
+ Zusatz \enquote{wie Anm.~\enquote{N}}, wobei \enquote{N} für
+ die Nummer der Fußnote steht, in der das Werk zuerst zitiert
+ wurde.
+ \item Die\beschreibung{pageref}
+ Option \option{pageref}, die es auch in den \bl"=Stilen
+ \xbx{verbose-note} und \xbx{ver\-bose-inote} gibt, ist ebenfalls
+ verfügbar. Setzt man sie auf \wert{true}, wird die Seite, auf der
+ das erste Zitat erscheint, zur Fußnotennummer, die auf das erste
+ Zitat verweist, hinzugefügt, sofern es sich nicht auf derselben
+ Seite befindet. Der Standard ist \wert{false}.
+ \item Wird \cmd{parencite} außerhalb einer Fußnote benutzt, werden keine
+ Klammern gesetzt, sondern stattdessen der Befehl \cmd{footcite}
+ ausgeführt. Innerhalb einer Fußnote funktioniert \cmd{parencite}
+ wie erwartet. Der Zusatz \enquote{wie Anm.~\ldots} wird dann von
+ eckigen Klammern eingeschlossen, nicht von runden Klammern.
+ \item Sind die Optionen \option{annotation} und \option{library} (oder eine
+ von ihnen) auf \wert{true} gesetzt, werden die Anmerkungen
+ (\texttt{annotation}) und Bibliotheksinformationen (\texttt{library})
+ nur in der Bibliographie ausgegeben (falls eine vorhanden ist), nicht
+ aber im Erstzitat und in der Sigelliste.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Die Querverweis-Funktionalität}
+\label{xreffunctionality}
+\subsection{Funktionsweise}
+Mit\beschreibung{xref} der Querverweis"=Funktionalität von \bldw{} können unselbständige
+Schriften auf einen \enquote{Eltern"=Eintrag} verweisen.
+Dazu wird in der bib-Datei ein Eltern"=Eintrag des Typs \texttt{@book}, \texttt{@collection}
+oder \texttt{@proceedings} angelegt. Jeder \enquote{Kind"=Eintrag}, der sich auf diesen
+Eltern"=Eintrag bezieht, verweist mit dem Feld \texttt{xref} auf den \BibTeX"=key des
+Eltern"=Eintrags. Das funktioniert für Einträge der Typen \texttt{@inbook},
+\texttt{@incollection} und \texttt{@inproceedings}.
+
+Zur Veranschaulichung ein kleines Beispiel:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@collection{parent,
+ editor = {(*\emph{Herausgeber}*)},
+ title = {(*\emph{Buchtitel}*)},
+ location = {(*\emph{Ort}*)},
+ date = {2008}
+}
+@incollection{child,
+ author = {(*\emph{Autor}*)},
+ title = {(*\emph{Titel des Beitrags}*)},
+ xref = {parent}% Verweis
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Wenn nun der \texttt{@incollection}"=Eintrag zitiert und die Option \option{xref} auf
+\wert{true} gesetzt wird, werden automatisch
+Daten aus dem Eintrag mit dem \BibTeX"=key \texttt{parent} übernommen. Dabei wird das Feld
+\texttt{shorthand} genutzt, sofern es vorhanden ist. Ansonsten werden die Felder
+\texttt{author}\slash\texttt{editor} und \texttt{title} (bzw. \texttt{shorttitle},
+falls vorhanden) ausgegeben. Damit wird der Leser auf den entsprechenden Eltern"=Eintrag
+im Literaturverzeichnis verwiesen und hat alle relevanten Daten, ohne dass sie
+mehrfach aufgeführt werden.
+
+Bei mehreren Kind"=Einträgen wäre es möglich, die Daten nicht mehrfach in die
+\BibTeX-Datei einzugeben (was auch die Möglichkeit von Tippfehlern reduzieren könnte).
+Allerdings sollte man sich bewusst sein, dass man dann \emph{immer} auf die
+Verweistechnik angewiesen ist. Sollte man einmal ein Dokument benötigen, in dem
+immer vollständige Einträge vorhanden sein sollen, würden die entsprechenden Daten
+(\texttt{editor}, \texttt{booktitle} etc.) fehlen. Deshalb ist es besser, auch
+bei \texttt{@incollection}, \texttt{@inbook} und \texttt{@inproceedings} immer
+die vollständigen Daten einzugeben und auf den Eltern"=Eintrag selbst mit dem
+\texttt{xref}"=Feld zu verweisen.
+
+Das \texttt{xref}"=Feld beachtet die Paketoption \option{mincrossrefs},
+die in der Standardeinstellung auf \wert{2} steht. Das heißt, wenn aus einem
+Sammelband nur ein einziger Beitrag zitiert wird, würde der Sammelband selbst nicht in das
+Literaturverzeichnis aufgenommen werden (es sei denn, er würde selbst explizit
+zitiert) und die Literaturangabe des Beitrags wäre nicht vollständig. Aus diesem Grund
+wird bei \option{xref=true} die Option \option{mincrossrefs} auf \wert{1} gesetzt.
+
+In der Standardeinstellung (oder mit \option{xref=false}) wird diese Verweistechnik
+nicht genutzt. Das \texttt{xref}-Feld kommt in diesem Fall nur insoweit zum Tragen, dass ein
+Eltern"=Eintrag nur dann als eigenständiger Eintrag im Literaturverzeichnis aufgeführt
+wird, wenn mindestens zwei seiner Kind"=Einträge zitiert wurden (\option{mincrossrefs=2}).
+Der Wert für \option{mincrossrefs} lässt sich natürlich individuell anpassen.
+
+\achtung{}Der Verweis funktioniert nur mit dem \texttt{xref}"=Feld. Mit dem Feld
+\texttt{crossref} arbeitet diese Verweistechnik \emph{nicht} zusammen! Anders als
+bei der Benutzung des Feldes \texttt{crossref} in herkömmlichem \BibTeX{}
+werden die fehlenden Felder nämlich nicht einfach in den Kind"=Eintrag importiert.
+Stattdessen wird ein spezieller Zitierbefehl ausgeführt, der die entsprechenden
+Daten des Eltern"=Eintrags liefert.
+
+\subsection{Besonderheiten}
+\subsubsection{Verwendung mit \xbx{footnote-dw}}
+Die Querverweis"=Funktionalität arbeitet auch mit dem Stil \xbx{footnote-dw} zusammen.
+Wenn man die Option \option{xref=true} verwendet, wird beim ersten Zitat des
+Eltern"=Eintrags ein \cmd{label} gesetzt. Dabei spielt es keine Rolle, ob der
+Eltern"=Eintrag selbst oder durch einen Kind"=Eintrag zitiert wurde. Sobald ein
+(zweiter) Kind"=Eintrag zitiert wird, wird ein Kurzzitat des Eltern"=Eintrags mit einem Verweis
+auf die Fußnote des ersten Zitats, in dem der Eltern"=Eintrag vorkam, ausgegeben.
+
+\subsubsection{Mehrbändige \enquote{Eltern}}
+Wenn ein Eltern"=Eintrag ein mehrbändiges Werk ist, bezieht sich der
+Kind"=Eintrag normalerweise auf einen bestimmten Band des Eltern"=Eintrags und
+nicht auf den gesamten Eintrag. Um das zu berücksichtigen, wird zunächst
+überprüft, ob im Kind-Eintrag das Feld \texttt{volume} vorhanden ist. Wenn dies
+der Fall ist, wird überprüft, ob im Eltern"=Eintrag das Feld \texttt{volume}
+ebenfalls vorhanden ist. Nur wenn das nicht der Fall ist, wird die Bandangabe
+des Kind"=Eintrags unmittelbar vor der Seitenangabe ausgegeben.%
+\footnote{Der Grund, warum auf das bloße Vorhandensein
+des \texttt{volume}"=Feldes und nicht auf die Übereinstimmung geprüft wird, ist folgender:
+Sobald das Feld \texttt{volume} des Eltern"=Eintrags vorhanden ist, handelt es sich
+um einen Einzelband eines mehrbändigen Werkes. Ist nun beim Kind"=Eintrag ein anderer
+Band im \texttt{volume}"=Feld angegeben, wird es sich um einen Fehler handeln. Mir ist
+jedenfalls kein Szenario eingefallen, bei dem ein Kind"=Eintrag eine andere Bandangabe
+erforderte als der dazugehörige Eltern"=Eintrag.} In diesem Fall wird gleichzeitig
+geprüft, ob die Angaben im Feld \texttt{date} übereinstimmen. Ist dies nicht der Fall
+(wenn etwa das mehrbändige Werk über mehrere Jahre erschienen ist), wird zusätzlich
+zur Bandangabe auch das Erscheinungsjahr ausgegeben. Außerdem wird dann schließlich
+auch noch überprüft, ob die Angaben im Feld \texttt{location} (oder \texttt{address})
+übereinstimmen. Tun sie das nicht (etwa wenn das mehrbändige Werk an unterschiedlichen
+Orten erschienen ist, der konkrete Band, auf den sich der Kind"=Eintrag bezieht, aber nur
+in einem Ort), wird vor dem Erscheinungsjahr auch noch der Erscheinungsort ausgegeben.
+
+\section{Die Optionen im Überblick}
+
+\subsection{Globale Optionen}
+Globale Optionen gelten für alle Literaturverweise im Dokument; sie werden entweder
+als Option beim Laden von \bl{} oder in einer Konfigurationsdatei (\texttt{biblatex.cfg})
+gesetzt. Der Wert in Klammern gibt den Standard an.
+ \optlist{acronyms}{false}
+ Nur wenn man die Option auf \wert{true} setzt, wird die Eintragsoption
+ \option{acronym} beachtet.
+ \optlist[nur \xbx{authortitle-dw}]{addyear}{false}
+ Setzt man die Option auf \wert{true}, wird in Literaturverweisen nach dem Titel
+ das Jahr in Klammern hinzugefügt.
+ \optlist{annotation}{false}
+ Das Feld \texttt{annotation} wird am Ende des Eintrags in der
+ Bibliographie ausgegeben.
+ \optlist{citeauthor}{namefont}
+ Legt den Schriftschnitt der Autorennamen bei Verwendung des Befehls \cmd{citeauthor}
+ fest. Mögliche Werte sind \wert{namefont}, \wert{normalfont} und
+ \wert{namefontfoot}.
+ \optlist{citeauthorname}{normal}
+ Legt fest, ob bei \cmd{citeauthor} oder \cmd{textcite} nur der Nachname oder der volle
+ Name ausgegeben wird. Mögliche Werte sind \wert{normal} (nur Nachname), \wert{full}
+ (immer voller Name) und \wert{firstfull} (beim ersten Zitat voller Name, danach nur
+ Nachname).
+ \optlist{citedas}{true}
+ Bei Einträgen mit \texttt{shorthand} wird dem Erstzitat (bei
+ \xbx{authortitle-dw} nur mit der Option \option{firstfull}) ein
+ \enquote{im Folgenden zit. als~\ldots} angefügt.
+ \optlist{citepages}{separate}
+ Legt fest, ob bei einem Voll- oder Erstzitat (bei \xbx{authortitle-dw} nur mit der
+ Option \option{firstfull}) eines Eintrags mit \texttt{pages}"=Feld die Seitenangaben
+ ausgegeben werden oder nicht.
+ \optlist{edbyidem}{true}
+ \enquote{hg.\,v.\,dems.} statt \enquote{hg.\,v. \emph{Herausgeber}}.
+ \optlist{editionstring}{false}
+ Setzt den Ausdruck \enquote{Aufl.} immer hinter die Edition, unabhängig vom Inhalt
+ des Feldes \texttt{edition}.
+ \optlist{editorstring}{parens}
+ Setzt den Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} (und bei \option{usetranslator=true}
+ auch \enquote{Übers.}) in runde Klammern (\wert{parens}) oder
+ in eckige Klammern (\wert{brackets}). Mit dem Wert \wert{normal} wird der
+ Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} nach dem Namen des Herausgebers und einem
+ angehängten Komma angefügt.
+ \optlist{editorstringfont}{normal}
+ Schriftart, die für den Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} (und bei \option{usetranslator=true}
+ auch \enquote{Übers.}) benutzt wird: normale Schrift (\wert{normal}) oder
+ die Schrift, die mit der Option \option{namefont} gewählt wurde (\wert{namefont}).
+ \optlist{edstringincitations}{true}
+ Setzt im Zitat den Ausdruck \enquote{Hrsg.} (und bei \option{usetranslator=true}
+ auch \enquote{Übers.}) hinter den Herausgeber bzw. Übersetzer.
+ \optlist{edsuper}{false}
+ Die Auf"|lage (\texttt{edition}) wird als hochgestellte Zahl direkt vor
+ dem Jahr ausgegeben.
+ \optlist[nur \xbx{authortitle-dw}]{firstfull}{false}
+ Beim ersten Zitat wird die volle Literaturangabe ausgegeben.
+ \optlist{firstnamefont}{normal}
+ Legt den Schriftschnitt der Vornamen von Autoren und Editoren fest, ebenso
+ von Namensaffixen und (mit der Option \option{useprefix=false})
+ Namenspräfixen.
+ Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv),
+ \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal} (Voreinstellung~-- das heißt,
+ der normale Schriftschnitt wird verwendet).
+ \optlist{ibidemfont}{normal}
+ Legt den Schriftschnitt von \enquote{ebenda}\slash\enquote{ebd.} fest.
+ Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv),
+ \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal} (Voreinstellung~-- das heißt,
+ der normale Schriftschnitt wird verwendet).
+ \optlist{idembib}{true}
+ \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} oder \enquote{---} statt Namen bei
+ aufeinanderfolgenden Einträgen derselben Autoren\slash Herausgeber in der
+ Bibliographie.
+ \optlist{idembibformat}{idem}
+ Nur bei Benutzung von \option{idembib=true}: Mit \wert{idem} werden die
+ Namen durch \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} ersetzt, mit \wert{dash}
+ durch einen langen Strich (\enquote{---}).
+ \optnur[kein Standard gesetzt]{idemfont}
+ Legt den Schriftschnitt von \enquote{Ders.}\slash\enquote{Dies.} fest.
+ Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv),
+ \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal}. Wird die Option nicht gesetzt, so
+ wird der Schriftschnitt von der Option \option{namefont} übernommen (das
+ ist auch die Voreinstellung).
+ \optlist[nur \xbx{authortitle-dw}]{inreference}{normal}
+ Mit \wert{inreference=full} werden \texttt{@inreference}"=Einträge in Literaturverweisen
+ vollständig ausgegeben, aber nicht in die Bibliographie aufgenommen.
+ \optlist{journalnumber}{standard}
+ Position der Heftnummer (\texttt{number}) einer Zeitschrift: bei
+ \wert{standard} wie in den Standard"=Stilen, bei \wert{afteryear} nach dem
+ Jahr (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}), eingeleitet durch den \emph{bibliography string} \enquote{number}
+ (\enquote{Nr.}), und bei \wert{date} in Abhängigkeit von den Datumsangaben
+ (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{journalnumberdate} auf
+ Seite~\pageref{journalnumberdate}).
+ \optlist{library}{false}
+ Das Feld \texttt{library} wird am Ende des Eintrags in der Bibliographie
+ ausgegeben.
+ \optlist{namefont}{normal}
+ Legt den Schriftschnitt der Nachnamen von Autoren und Editoren fest,
+ ebenso von Namenspräfixen (mit der Option \option{useprefix=true}).
+ Mögliche Werte sind \wert{smallcaps} (Kapitälchen), \wert{italic} (kursiv),
+ \wert{bold} (fett) und \wert{normal} (Voreinstellung~-- das heißt,
+ der normale Schriftschnitt wird verwendet).
+ \optlist{nopublisher}{true}
+ Der Verlag wird nicht ausgegeben.
+ \optlist{nolocation}{false}
+ Setzt man die Option auf \wert{true}, wird der Ort nicht ausgegeben.
+ Außerdem wird dann auch der Verlag nicht ausgegeben,
+ selbst wenn \option{nopublisher} auf \wert{false} gesetzt wird.
+ \optlist{oldauthor}{true}
+ Setzt man die Option auf \wert{false}, werden die Eintragsoptionen
+ \option{oldauthor} und \option{oldbookauthor} ignoriert.
+ \optlist{omiteditor}{false}
+ Unterdrückt die Ausgabe des Herausgebers in Literaturverweisen.
+ \optlist{origfields}{true}
+ Mit \option{origfields=true} werden die Felder \texttt{origlocation} und
+ \texttt{origdate} (sowie \texttt{origpublisher}, wenn
+ \option{nopublisher=false} eingestellt ist) ausgegeben.
+ \optlist{origfieldsformat}{punct}
+ Mit dieser Option kann man einstellen, wie die Angaben zum Nachdruck (mit
+ \option{origfields=true}) ausgegeben werden sollen: in runden
+ (\wert{parens}) oder eckigen (\wert{brackets}) Klammern, oder eingeleitet
+ durch \cmd{origfieldspunct} (Voreinstellung ist ein Komma).
+ \optlist[nur \xbx{footnote-dw}]{pageref}{false}
+ Zusätzlich zur Fußnotennummer wird auch auf die Seitenzahl des ersten Zitats
+ verwiesen.
+ \optlist{pagetotal}{false}
+ Das Feld \texttt{pagetotal} wird ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt.
+ \optlist{pseudoauthor}{true}
+ Setzt man die Option auf \wert{false}, werden Autoren von Einträgen mit der Eintragsoption
+ \option{pseudoauthor} \emph{nicht} ausgegeben.
+ \optlist{series}{standard}
+ Position der Reihe (\texttt{series}) eines Werkes: bei \wert{standard} wie
+ in den Standard"=Stilen, bei \wert{afteryear} nach dem Jahr und bei \wert{beforeedition} vor der Auf"|lage
+ (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}).
+ \optlist{seriesformat}{parens}
+ Format der Reihe (\texttt{series}) eines Werkes: bei \wert{standard} wie in
+ den Standard"=Stilen, bei \wert{parens} in Klammern.
+ \optlist{shorthandibid}{true}
+ Direkte Folgezitate von Einträgen mit \texttt{shorthand} werden durch
+ \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt.
+ \optlist{shorthandinbib}{false}
+ Setzt man die Option auf \wert{true}, werden die Siglen (\texttt{shorthand})
+ im Literaturverzeichnis direkt vor dem Eintrag ausgegeben.
+ \optnur[kein Standard gesetzt]{shorthandwidth}
+ Legt die Breite der Label im Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)}
+ fest. Gleichzeitig werden nach jedem Label \cmd{shorthandsep}
+ (standardmäßig 3pt) und \cmd{shorthandpunct} (standardmäßig ein
+ Doppelpunkt) ausgeführt.
+ \optlist{shortjournal}{false}
+ Mit \option{shortjournal=true} wird das Feld \texttt{shortjournal} statt des
+ \texttt{journaltitle} ausgewertet. Falls \texttt{shortjournal} nicht
+ vorhanden ist, wird \texttt{journaltitle} (und ggf. \texttt{journalsubtitle})
+ verwendet.
+ \optlist{singletitle}{false}
+ Setzt man die Option auf \wert{true}, wird der Titel in Literaturverweisen
+ unterdrückt, falls nicht mehr als ein Werk desselben Autors vorhanden ist.
+ Vollzitate sind davon ausgenommen.
+ \optlist{terselos}{true}
+ Es wird ein knapperes Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)}
+ ausgegeben.
+ \optlist{xref}{false}
+ Die Querverweis"=Funktionalität wird verwendet und die Option \option{mincrossrefs}
+ auf den Wert \wert{1} gesetzt. Genaueres dazu findet sich
+ im Abschnitt~\ref{xreffunctionality} auf Seite~\pageref{xreffunctionality}.
+
+\subsection{Optionen für einzelne Einträge}
+Eintragsoptionen werden für jeden einzelnen Eintrag im Feld \texttt{options} gesetzt.
+Sie überschreiben für den jeweiligen Eintrag eventuell gesetzte globale Optionen.
+ \opt{acronym}
+ Die Siglen (\texttt{shorthand}, bei \option{shortjournal=true} auch
+ \texttt{shortjournal}) werden mit dem Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} gesetzt,
+ sofern die globale Option \option{acronyms} aktiviert ist.
+ \opt{citedas}
+ Bei Einträgen mit \texttt{shorthand} nach dem Erstzitat (bei
+ \xbx{authortitle-dw} nur mit der Option \option{firstfull}) das
+ angefügte \enquote{im Folgenden zit. als~\ldots} erzwingen (\wert{true})
+ bzw. unterdrücken (\wert{false}).
+ \opt{oldauthor}
+ Der Autor (Feld \texttt{author}) wird nicht in dem mit \option{namefont} gewählten Schriftschnitt
+ gesetzt, sofern die globale Option \option{oldauthor} aktiviert ist.
+ \opt{oldbookauthor}
+ Der Buchautor (Feld \texttt{bookauthor}) wird nicht in dem mit \option{namefont} gewählten Schriftschnitt
+ gesetzt, sofern die globale Option \option{oldauthor} aktiviert ist.
+ \opt{pseudoauthor}
+ Der Autor wird von \cmd{bibleftpseudo} und \cmd{bibrightpseudo} umgeben,
+ sofern die globale Option \option{pseudoauthor} auf \wert{true} gesetzt ist.
+ Bei globaler Option \option{pseudoauthor=false} wird der Autor von Einträgen
+ mit der Eintragsoption \option{pseudoauthor=true} gar nicht ausgegeben.
+ \opt{shorthandibid}
+ Bei Einträgen mit Sigle (\texttt{shorthand}) wird~-- unabhängig von der
+ globalen Option \option{shorthandibid}~-- bei direkt aufeinanderfolgenden
+ Wiederholungszitaten die Sigle durch \enquote{ebd.} ersetzt (\wert{true})
+ bzw. nicht ersetzt (\wert{false}).
+
+\subsection{\texorpdfstring{\bl"=}{biblatex-}Optionen}
+Im Folgenden werden Optionen aufgeführt, die von \bl{} zur Verfügung gestellt und von \bldw{} lediglich auf einen bestimmten Wert voreingestellt werden. Nähere Informationen zu diesen Optionen sind der \bl"=Dokumentation zu entnehmen.
+
+ \optset{autocite}{footnote}
+ Für den Befehl \cmd{autocite} wird ein \cmd{footcite} ausgeführt.
+ \optset{citetracker}{true}
+ Der \emph{citation tracker}, der überprüft, ob ein Werk bereits zitiert
+ wurde, wird global aktiviert.
+ \optset{doi}{false}
+ Das Feld \texttt{doi} wird ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt.
+ \optset{eprint}{false}
+ Das Feld \texttt{eprint} wird ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt.
+ \optset{ibidtracker}{constrict}
+ Bei direkten Folgezitaten desselben Werks wird \enquote{ebd.} ausgegeben.
+ Dabei werden Text und Fußnoten unabhängig voneinander behandelt.
+ \optset{idemtracker}{constrict}
+ Bei direkten Folgezitaten desselben Autors wird dessen Name durch
+ \enquote{ders.} ersetzt. Dabei werden Text und Fußnoten unabhängig
+ voneinander behandelt.
+ \optset{isbn}{false}
+ Die Felder \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{isrn} und \texttt{issn} werden
+ ausgegeben oder die Ausgabe unterdrückt.
+ \optset{loccittracker}{false}
+ Der \emph{\enquote{loccit} tracker}, der überprüft, ob die Stelle eines
+ Werks dieselbe ist wie die des zuletzt von diesem Autor zitierten Werks,
+ wird ausgeschaltet.
+ \optset{opcittracker}{false}
+ Der \emph{\enquote{opcit} tracker}, der überprüft, ob das Werk dasselbe
+ ist wie das letzte von diesem Autor zitierte Werk, wird ausgeschaltet.
+ \optset{pagetracker}{true}
+ Der \emph{page tracker} wird eingeschaltet; bei einseitigen Dokumenten
+ prüft er auf einzelne Seiten, bei zweiseitigen Dokumenten auf
+ Doppelseiten. Die internen Tests \cmd{iffirstonpage} und \cmd{ifsamepage}
+ machen Gebrauch von dieser Einstellung.
+% \optset[footnote-dw]{uniquename}{false}
+% Es werden immer Vor- und Nachnamen ausgegeben.
+
+\subsection{Die Option \option{journalnumber=date}}
+\label{journalnumberdate}
+Anstatt viele Worte zu verlieren, um zu beschreiben, wie die Option
+funktioniert, werden im Folgenden einfach entsprechende Beispiele
+gezeigt. Dabei erscheint zunächst immer der \BibTeX"=Eintrag und darunter die
+entsprechende Ausgabe mit \option{journalnumber=date}. Die Beispiele wurden
+von Bernhard Tempel zusammengestellt.
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939a}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a,
+ author = {Gerstmann, Günter},
+ title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus},
+ journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel},
+ date = {2007},
+ volume = {42},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {13},
+ issue = {Januar--März}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Gerstmann:2007a}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{GMG:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{GMG:1939}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950,
+ author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]},
+ title = {Creativity},
+ journal = {The American Psychologist},
+ date = {1950-09},
+ volume = {5},
+ number = {9},
+ pages = {444--454}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Guilford:1950}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Page:1997,
+ author = {Page, Penny Booth},
+ title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies},
+ subtitle = {A critical essay},
+ journal = {Addiction},
+ date = {1997},
+ volume = {92},
+ number = {12},
+ pages = {1619-1637}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Page:1997}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939b}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939c}
+
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906,
+ author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz},
+ title = {Rausch und Kunst},
+ journal = {Blaubuch},
+ date = {1906},
+ volume = {1},
+ pages = {1726-1730},
+ issue = {4. Quartal},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Ewers:1906}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-13}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939d}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939e}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000,
+ author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.},
+ title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen},
+ journal = {Therapeutische Umschau},
+ date = {2000},
+ volume = {57},
+ pages = {241-245},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Landolt:2000}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930,
+ author = {Chapiro, Joseph},
+ title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}},
+ journal = {Neue Freie Presse},
+ number = {23773},
+ pages = {1-3},
+ issue = {Morgenblatt},
+ date = {1930-11-19},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Chapiro:1930}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939f}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Barski:2007,
+ author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard},
+ title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick},
+ journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen},
+ date = {2007},
+ number = {119},
+ pages = {62},
+ issue = {IV},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Barski:2007}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Essig:2005,
+ author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard},
+ title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld},
+ subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung},
+ number = {237},
+ pages = {16},
+ date = {2005-10-14},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Essig:2005}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007,
+ author = {Kluwe, Sandra},
+ title = {Furor poeticus},
+ subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik Rilkes und Kafkas},
+ journal = {literaturkritik.de},
+ date = {2007-02},
+ number = {2},
+ url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Kluwe:2007}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006,
+ author = {Burckhardt, Barbara},
+ title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen},
+ subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber},
+ journal = {Theater heute},
+ date = {2006},
+ number = {5},
+ pages = {14-18},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Burckhardt:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922,
+ author = {Ossietzky, Carl von},
+ title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater},
+ journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung},
+ date = {1922-03-30},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot}
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Ossietzky:1922}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausgabe},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939g}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960,
+ author = {Weiss, Grigorij},
+ title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke},
+ subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ journal = {Sinn und Form},
+ date = {1960},
+ pages = {363--385},
+ issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher},
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Weiss:1960}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006,
+ author = {Hofer, Hermann},
+ title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten},
+ subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater},
+ journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten},
+ date = {2006-03-14}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Hofer:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006,
+ author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko},
+ title = {Rose Bernd},
+ journal = {Szene Hamburg},
+ date = {2006-04}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Kammerhoff:2006}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+\fullcite{Fingiert:1939h}
+
+\section{Befehle, Begriffe, Eintragstypen, Feldformate}
+\subsection{Zusätzliche Befehle}
+Im Folgenden werden die von \bldw{} zur Verfügung gestellten Befehle mit ihrer Standarddefinition aufgelistet. Diese Befehle können mit \cmd{renewcommand*} angepasst werden.
+
+% \befehl{}{}{}
+% \befehlleer{}{}
+ \befehl{annotationfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{itshape}}{Schrift des Feldes
+ \texttt{annotation}.}
+ \befehl{bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+ \cmd{ifnum}\cmd{value}\{liststop\}\textgreater 2\%\\
+ \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{finalandcomma}\cmd{fi}\%\\
+ \hspace*{8.1em}\cmd{addspace}\cmd{bibstring\{and\}}\cmd{space}}{Begrenzer
+ zwischen dem vorletzten und letzten Namen bei Literaturangaben in der
+ Bibliographie. Vergleiche \cmd{finalnamedelim} von \bl.}
+ \befehlleer{bibleftpseudo}{Zeichen vor dem Autor bei Benutzung von
+ \option{pseudoauthor=true}.}
+ \befehl{bibmultinamedelim}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Begrenzer
+ zwischen Namen bei Literaturangaben in der Bibliographie. Vergleiche
+ \cmd{multinamedelim} von \bl.}
+ \befehl{bibrevsdnamedelim}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zusätzliches Zeichen zwischen dem
+ ersten und zweiten Namen bei Literaturangaben in der Bibliographie beim
+ Schema \enquote{Nachname, Vorname, Vorname Nachname}. Das Komma ist damit
+ nicht gemeint! Vergleiche \cmd{revsdnamedelim} von \bl.}
+ \befehlleer{bibrightpseudo}{Zeichen nach dem Autor bei Benutzung von
+ \option{pseudoauthor=true}.}
+ \befehl{citefinalnamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Begrenzer zwischen dem vorletzten
+ und letzten Namen in Zitaten. Vergleiche \cmd{finalnamedelim} von \bl.}
+ \befehl{citemultinamedelim}{\cmd{slash}}{Begrenzer zwischen Namen in Zitaten.
+ Vergleiche \cmd{multinamedelim} von \bl.}
+ \befehlleer{citerevsdnamedelim}{Zusätzliches Zeichen zwischen
+ dem ersten und zweiten Namen in Zitaten beim Schema \enquote{Nachname,
+ Vorname, Vorname Nachname}. Das Komma ist damit nicht gemeint! Vergleiche
+ \cmd{revsdnamedelim} von \bl.}
+ \befehl{journumstring}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}\cmd{bibstring\{number\}}%
+ \cmd{addnbspace}}{Zeichen\slash Begriff vor der Heftnummer
+ (\texttt{number}) einer Zeitschrift.}
+ \befehl{jourvolnumsep}{\cmd{adddot}}{Zeichen zwischen Band und Heftnummer
+ einer Zeitschrift (bei \option{journumafteryear=false}).}
+ \befehl{jourvolstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen\slash Begriff vor dem
+ Jahrgangsband (\texttt{volume}) einer Zeitschrift.}
+ \befehl{libraryfont}{\cmd{small}\cmd{sffamily}}{Schrift des Feldes
+ \texttt{library}.}
+ \befehl{locationdatepunct}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen zwischen Ort (\texttt{location})
+ und Jahr (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) bei \option{nopublisher=true} oder
+ wenn kein Verlag angegeben wurde.}
+ \befehl{locationpublisherpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen zwischen Ort (\texttt{location})
+ und Verlag (\texttt{publisher}) bei \option{nopublisher=false}.}
+ \befehl{origfieldspunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen vor dem
+ Nachdruck bei \option{origfields=true} und
+ \option{origfieldsformat=punct}.}
+ \befehl{publisherdatepunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen zwischen Verlag (\texttt{publisher})
+ und Jahr (\texttt{year}\slash \texttt{date}) bei \option{nopublisher=false}.}
+ \befehlleer{seriespunct}{Zeichen vor dem Reihentitel (\texttt{series}),
+ innerhalb der Klammer.}
+ \befehl{sernumstring}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen\slash Begriff zwischen dem
+ Reihentitel (\texttt{series}) und der Nummer (\texttt{number}).}
+ \befehl{shorthandinbibpunct}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen nach einer Sigle im Literaturverzeichnis, wenn
+ \option{shorthandinbib} benutzt wird.}
+ \befehl{shorthandpunct}{\cmd{addcolon}}{Zeichen nach einer Sigle im Sigelverzeichnis, wenn
+ \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt wird.}
+ \befehl{shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}{Länge zwischen Sigle und
+ Siglenbeschreibung, wenn \option{shorthandwidth} benutzt wird.}
+ \befehl{textcitesdelim}{\cmd{addspace}\cmd{bibstring\{and\}}\cmd{space}}{Trenner zwischen
+ mehreren Autoren bei Verwendung von \cmd{textcites}.}
+ \befehl{titleaddonpunct}{\cmd{addperiod}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen vor dem
+ Titelzusatz (\texttt{titleaddon}, \texttt{booktitleaddon},
+ \texttt{maintitleaddon}).}
+ \befehl{titleyeardelim}{\cmd{addspace}}{Zeichen zwischen Titel
+ (\texttt{title}) und Jahr (\texttt{year}) bei Nutzung von \option{add\-year=true}.}
+
+\subsection{Geänderte Befehle}
+In dieser Liste werden die Befehle aufgeführt, die von \bl{} zur Verfügung
+gestellt und von \bldw{} umdefiniert werden. Diese Befehle können mit
+\cmd{renewcommand*} angepasst werden.
+ \befehl{labelnamepunct}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen nach Namen im
+ Literaturverzeichnis.}
+ \befehl{nametitledelim}{\cmd{addcolon}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen zwischen Name und Titel in
+ Zitaten.}
+ \befehl{newunitpunct}{\cmd{addcomma}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen zwischen einzelnen Elementen
+ im Literaturverzeichnis.}
+ \befehl{subtitlepunct}{\cmd{addperiod}\cmd{space}}{Zeichen zwischen Titel und Untertitel.}
+
+\subsection{Zusätzliche Begriffe \emph{(bibliography strings)}}
+In dieser Liste werden die von \bldw{} zusätzlich definierten Begriffe
+aufgeführt. Es gibt sie jeweils in einer langen und einer abgekürzten Form.
+Welche Form verwendet wird, hängt von der \bl"=Option \option{abbreviate} ab.
+
+\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm}
+ \biblstring{idemdat}{demselben}{dems\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{idemdatsf}{derselben}{ders\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{idemdatsm}{demselben}{dems\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{idemdatsn}{demselben}{dems\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{idemdatpf}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{idemdatpm}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{idemdatpn}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{idemdatpp}{denselben}{dens\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{inrefstring}{Artikel\cmd{addspace}}{Art\cmd{adddotspace}}
+ \biblstring{review}{Rezension\cmd{addspace} zu}{Rez\cmd{adddotspace} zu}
+\end{labeling}
+
+Die \emph{bibliography strings} lassen sich folgendermaßen umdefinieren, wobei
+nicht zwischen einer langen und einer kurzen Form unterschieden werden kann:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\DefineBibliographyStrings{german}{%
+ idemdat = {idem},
+ idemdatsf = {eadem}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\subsection{Geänderte Begriffe \emph{(bibliography strings)}}
+In dieser Liste werden die Begriffe aufgeführt, die von \bl{} zur Verfügung
+gestellt und von \bldw{} umdefiniert werden. Ob die lange oder die abgekürzte
+Variante verwendet wird, hängt von der \bl"=Option \option{abbreviate} ab.
+
+\begin{labeling}{mmmmmmm}
+% \biblstring{}{}{}
+ \biblstring{seenote}{wie Anmerkung}{wie Anm\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{reprint}{Nachdruck}{Ndr\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{reprintof}{Nachdruck von}{\\Ndr\cmd{adddot}\cmd{addabthinspace} v\cmd{adddot}}
+ \biblstring{reprintas}{Nachdruck unter dem Titel}{\\Ndr\cmd{adddotspace} u\cmd{adddot}\cmd{addabthinspace}\\%
+ d\cmd{adddot}\textbackslash{} Titel}
+ \biblstring{byauthor}{von}{v\cmd{adddot}}
+\end{labeling}
+Auch die übrigen zusammengesetzten Abkürzungen (wie das in der obigen Liste aufgeführte \enquote{Ndr.\,v.})
+verwenden den Befehl \cmd{add\-ab\-thin\-space}, also einen kurzen Abstand zwischen
+den einzelnen Teilen der Abkürzung. Die genaue Bedeutung dieses Befehls wird
+in der \bl"=Dokumentation erklärt.
+
+\subsection{Eintragstypen}
+Die folgenden Eintragstypen werden anders als in \bl{} verwendet.
+ \eintragstyp{inreference}{Lexikon-Artikel}{incollection}
+ \eintragstyp{review}{Rezension~-- auf das rezensierte Werk kann mit \texttt{xref}
+ verwiesen werden}{article}
+
+\subsection{Zusätzliche Feldformate}
+In dieser Liste werden die von \bldw{} zusätzlich definierten Feldformate
+aufgeführt.
+
+\feldformat{shorthandinbib}{mkbibbrackets\{\#1\}}{Formatierung der Siglen
+ bei \option{shorthandinbib=true}.}
+
+\section{Weitere Hinweise}
+\label{weitere-anpassungen}
+Die folgenden Hinweise verstehen sich als Anregung für fortgeschrittene Anwender
+und beschreiben weitere Anpassungen, die von den Optionen des Pakets \bldw{}
+nicht abgedeckt werden.
+
+\subsection{Trennzeichen zwischen Namen}
+Anders als \bl{} unterscheidet \bldw{} zwischen den Trennzeichen, die in
+Zitaten verwendet werden, und denen in der Bibliographie. Bei \bl{} gibt es
+lediglich \cmd{multinamedelim} (zwischen mehreren Autoren),
+\cmd{finalnamedelim} (vor dem letzten Autor) und \cmd{revsdnamedelim}
+(zusätzliches Zeichen bei \enquote{Nachname, Vorname\textbar\ und Vorname2
+Nachname2}: dort wo \textbar\ steht, würde \cmd{revsdnamedelim} eingefügt
+werden).
+
+\bldw{} hingegen hat \cmd{bibmultinamedelim}, \cmd{bibfinalnamedelim} und
+\cmd{bibrevsdnamedelim} für die Bibliographie sowie \cmd{citemultinamedelim},
+\cmd{citefinalnamedelim} und \cmd{citerevsdnamedelim} für die Literaturverweise
+im Text. Außerdem werden \cmd{multinamedelim}, \cmd{finalnamedelim} und
+\cmd{revsdnamedelim} im Sigelverzeichnis \emph{(List of Shorthands)} verwendet.
+Damit lassen sich unterschiedliche Darstellungsweisen festlegen. Die
+Standarddefinitionen sehen folgendermaßen aus:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[commentstyle=]
+\newcommand*{\multinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\finalnamedelim}{%
+ \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+ \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}
+\newcommand*{\revsdnamedelim}{}
+
+\newcommand*{\bibmultinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+ \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+ \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}%
+\newcommand*{\bibrevsdnamedelim}{\addspace}
+
+\newcommand*{\citemultinamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citefinalnamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citerevsdnamedelim}{}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Damit wird bei mehreren Autoren im Text ein Schrägstrich (/) ausgegeben, im
+Literaturverzeichnis und im Sigelverzeichnis dagegen Kommata bzw. (vor dem
+letzten Namen) ein \enquote{und}. Die Definitionen für das Literatur- und das
+Sigelverzeichnis stimmen also mit den Standarddefinitionen von \bl{} überein.
+Mit \cmd{renewcommand*} lassen sich diese Befehle nach eigenen Bedürfnissen
+anpassen.
+
+\subsection{Darstellung von Siglen (\cmd{mkbibacro})}
+\label{mkbibacro-anpassen}
+Wenn eine Sigle (\texttt{shorthand}) ein Akronym ist (z.\,B. \enquote{LMA} für
+das \emph{Lexikon des Mittelalters}), kann man dem Eintrag
+\texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym= true\}} hinzufügen und die globale Option
+\option{acronyms=true} nutzen. Dann wird die Sigle mit dem Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro}
+gesetzt. Dasselbe gilt für Abkürzungen von Zeitschriften (z.\,B. \enquote{HZ} für
+die \emph{Historische Zeitschrift}); hier benutzt man die Felder
+\texttt{shortjournal\,=\,\{HZ\}} und \texttt{options\,=\,\{acronym=true\}}.
+
+In \bl{} werden Akronyme (also Abkürzungen) wie z.\,B. \enquote{\textsc{url}} in
+Kapitälchen gesetzt. Dazu wird der Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} benutzt, der standardmäßig
+folgendermaßen definiert ist:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\newcommand*{\mkbibacro}[1]{%
+ \ifcsundef{\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series/sc}
+ {#1}
+ {\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Das bedeutet: Falls Kapitälchen in der verwendeten Schrift vorhanden sind, werden
+Akronyme in Kapitälchen gesetzt, ansonsten normal.
+
+Hat man in einer Schrift keine Kapitälchen, kann man für
+Akronyme Großbuchstaben verwenden, die leicht gesperrt werden und etwas kleiner
+sind als gewöhnliche Großbuchstaben. Die Sperrung lässt sich (bei Verwendung von
+\paket{pdftex} bzw. \paket{pdf"|latex}) mit dem Paket \paket{microtype} einstellen. Die
+Verkleinerung lässt sich mit dem Paket \paket{scalefnt} erreichen. Somit könnte man
+den Befehl \cmd{mkbibacro} folgendermaßen anpassen:
+\begin{lstlisting}
+\usepackage{scalefnt}
+\usepackage{microtype}
+\renewcommand{\mkbibacro}[1]{%
+ \textls[55]{\scalefont{0.95}#1}\isdot}
+\end{lstlisting}
+Die Werte für \cmd{textls} und \cmd{scalefont} lassen sich natürlich den eigenen
+Vorstellungen oder Anforderungen anpassen.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-authortitle-dw.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-authortitle-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d479778800
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-authortitle-dw.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-authortitle-dw.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-authortitle-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7c7ede7678
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-authortitle-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@
+% v 1.7
+% This file presents the `authortitle-dw' style
+%
+\listfiles
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
+\usepackage[autostyle]{csquotes}
+\usepackage[
+ style=authortitle-dw,
+%% biblatex-dw-Optionen %%%
+% acronyms=true,
+% addyear=true,
+ annotation=true,
+% citeauthor=normalfont,%namefontfoot,%namefont,
+% citeauthorname=firstfull,%full,%normal
+% citedas=false,
+% citepages=suppress,%omit,%permit,%separate,
+% edbyidem=false,
+% editorstring=normal,%brackets,
+% edstringincitations=false,
+% edsuper=true,
+% firstfull=true,
+% firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% idembib=false,
+% idembibformat=dash,
+% idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% inreference=full,%normal,
+% journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard
+ library=true,
+% namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% nolocation=true,
+% nopublisher=false,
+% oldauthor=false,
+% omiteditor=true,
+% origfields=false,
+% origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct,
+% pagetotal=true,
+% pseudoauthor=false,
+ series=beforeedition,%afteryear,%beforeedition,%standard
+% shorthandibid=false,
+% shorthandinbib=true,
+% shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em,
+% shortjournal=true,
+% terselos=false,
+% xref=true,
+%% biblatex-Optionen %%%
+% autocite=plain,
+% citetracker=false,
+% doi=true,
+% eprint=true,
+% ibidpage=true,
+% ibidtracker=false,
+% idemtracker=false,
+% isbn=true,
+% pagetracker=false,
+ hyperref,
+ backend=biber
+]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\bibliography{de-examples-dw}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+
+%\renewcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{\bibleftbracket}
+%\renewcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{\bibrightbracket}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Der Stil \texttt{authortitle-dw}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite}-Beispiele}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[Siehe][]{springer}
+
+\cite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][]{springer}.
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor}- und \cmd{parencite*}-Beispiele}
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[Siehe][]{springer}.
+
+\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[Siehe][92--95]{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite[Siehe][]{springer}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext.\footcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite}-Beispiele}
+
+\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist.
+
+\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist.
+
+\textcite[Siehe][]{springer} für mehr Fülltext.
+
+\textcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer} für mehr Fülltext.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \autocite{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{Mehrere Zitate}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\subsection*{Shorthand-Beispiele}
+
+\cite{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite[noch einmal]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite{kant:ku}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][]{springer}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][]{springer}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\printshorthands
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-examples-dw.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-examples-dw.bib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c89d3018f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-examples-dw.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,851 @@
+@PREAMBLE{ "\providecommand*{\BibTeX}{Bib\TeX} " }
+
+@STRING{cup = {Cambridge University Press}}
+
+@STRING{dtv = {Deutscher Taschenbuch-Verlag}}
+
+@ARTICLE{angenendt,
+ author = {Angenendt, Arnold},
+ title = {In Honore Salvatoris~-- Vom Sinn und Unsinn der Patrozinienkunde},
+ shorttitle = {In Honore Salvatoris},
+ volume = {97},
+ date = {2002},
+ pages = {431--456, 791--823},
+ annotation = {Ein deutschsprachiger Aufsatz in einer französischen Zeitschrift.
+ Abgesehen davon ein typischer \texttt{article}-Eintrag. Man beachte
+ die Felder \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{shortjournal} und \texttt{options}.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indextitle = {In Honore Salvatoris},
+ journaltitle = {Revue d'Histoire Eccl{\'e}siastique},
+ shortjournal = {RHE},
+ library = {Im Feld \texttt{library} ist Platz für Bibliotheksinformationen.},
+ options = {acronym=true}
+}
+
+@BOOK{aristotle:rhetoric,
+ author = {Aristoteles},
+ title = {The Rhetoric of Aristotle with a commentary by the late Edward Meredith
+ Cope},
+ shorttitle = {Rhetoric},
+ publisher = cup,
+ date = {1877},
+ editor = {Cope, Edward Meredith},
+ annotation = {Eine kommentierte Edition. Man beachte die Verknüpfung der Felder
+ \texttt{editor} und \texttt{commentator} sowie \texttt{volumes},
+ \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{indextitle}.},
+ commentator = {Cope, Edward Meredith},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ indextitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle, The},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ sorttitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle},
+ volumes = {3}
+}
+
+@BOOK{aristotle:anima,
+ author = {Aristoteles},
+ title = {De Anima},
+ publisher = cup,
+ date = {1907},
+ editor = {Hicks, Robert Drew},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit Autor (\texttt{author}) und Herausgeber
+ (\texttt{editor}).},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ location = {Cambridge},
+ options = {oldauthor}
+}
+
+@BOOK{aristotle:poetics,
+ author = {Aristoteles},
+ title = {Poetics},
+ shorttitle = {Poetics},
+ publisher = {Clarendon Press},
+ date = {1968},
+ editor = {Lucas, D. W.},
+ series = {Clarendon Aristotle},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit Autor (\texttt{author}) und Herausgeber
+ (\texttt{editor}) sowie einem \texttt{series}-Feld.},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ location = {Oxford},
+ options = {oldauthor}
+}
+
+@BOOK{aristotle:physics,
+ author = {Aristoteles},
+ title = {Physics},
+ shorttitle = {Physics},
+ publisher = {G. P. Putnam},
+ date = {1929},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit einem \texttt{translator}-Feld.},
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ location = {New York},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ translator = {Wicksteed, P. H. and Cornford, F. M.}
+}
+
+@BOOK{averroes/bland,
+ author = {Averroes},
+ title = {The Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction with the Active Intellect
+ by Ibn Rushd with the Commentary of Moses Narboni},
+ shorttitle = {Possibility of Conjunction},
+ publisher = {Jewish Theological Seminary of America},
+ date = {1982},
+ editor = {Bland, Kalman P.},
+ series = {Moreshet Studies in Jewish History, Literature and Thought},
+ number = {7},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit Reihe (\texttt{series}) und Reihennummer
+ (\texttt{number}).},
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ indextitle = {Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction, The},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ location = {New York},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ translator = {Bland, Kalman P.}
+}
+
+@BOOK{averroes/hannes,
+ author = {Averroes},
+ title = {Des Averro{\"e}s Abhandlung: \enquote{{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit
+ der Conjunktion} oder \enquote{{\"U}ber den materiellen Intellekt}},
+ shorttitle = {M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ publisher = {C.~A. Kaemmerer},
+ date = {1892},
+ editor = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+ annotation = {Eine kommentierte Edition. Man beachte die Verknüpfung der Felder
+ \texttt{editor}, \texttt{translator} und \texttt{commentator}; ebenso
+ die Felder \texttt{shorttitle}, \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{sorttitle},
+ und \texttt{indexsorttitle}.},
+ annotator = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indexsorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ indextitle = {{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ location = {Halle an der Saale},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ sorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ translator = {Hannes, Ludwig}
+}
+
+@BOOK{averroes/hercz,
+ author = {Averroes},
+ title = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction des separaten Intellects
+ mit dem Menschen},
+ shorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen},
+ subtitle = {Von Averroes (Vater und Sohn), aus dem Arabischen {\"u}bersetzt von
+ Samuel Ibn Tibbon},
+ publisher = {S.~Hermann},
+ date = {1869},
+ editor = {Hercz, J.},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag. Man beachte die Verknüpfung der Felder
+ \texttt{editor} und \texttt{translator} sowie die Felder \texttt{indextitle}
+ und \texttt{indexsorttitle}.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indexsorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen uber die Conjunction},
+ indextitle = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction},
+ keywords = {primary},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ translator = {Hercz, J.}
+}
+
+@INCOLLECTION{brandt,
+ author = {von Brandt, Ahasver and Erich Hoffmann},
+ title = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis
+ 1448},
+ shorttitle = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder},
+ pages = {884--917},
+ editor = {Ferdinand Seibt},
+ booktitle = {Europa im Hoch- und Sp{\"a}tmittelalter},
+ publisher = {Klett-Cotta},
+ date = {1987},
+ series = {Handbuch der europ{\"a}ischen Geschichte},
+ number = {2},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{incollection}-Eintrag mit Reihe (\texttt{series}) und
+ Nummer (\texttt{number}). Man beachte das Format des Namens und vergleiche
+ die \texttt{useprefix}-Option im Feld \texttt{options}. Man beachte
+ außerdem die Felder \texttt{indextitle} und \texttt{indexsorttitle}.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indexsorttitle = {Nordischen Lander von der Mitte des 11. Jahrhunderts bis 1448},
+ indextitle = {Nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis 1448,
+ Die},
+ location = {Stuttgart},
+ options = {useprefix=false}
+}
+
+@BOOK{cicero,
+ author = {Cicero, Marcus Tullius},
+ title = {De natura deorum. {\"U}ber das Wesen der G{\"o}tter},
+ shorttitle = {De natura deorum},
+ publisher = {Reclam},
+ date = {1995},
+ editor = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula},
+ afterword = {Thraede, Klaus},
+ annotation = {Eine zweisprachige Edition von Ciceros \emph{De natura deorum} mit
+ deutscher Übersetzung. Man beachte das Format des \texttt{language}-Felds
+ in der \texttt{bib}-Datei, die Verknüpfung der Felder \texttt{editor}
+ und \texttt{translator} sowie das Feld \texttt{afterword}.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indextitle = {De natura deorum},
+ language = {langlatin and langgerman},
+ location = {Stuttgart},
+ translator = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula}
+}
+
+@Article{duggan,
+ author = {Duggan, Anne J.},
+ title = {The Lorv\~ao transcription of Benedict of Peterborough's \emph{Liber
+ miraculorum beati Thome}: Lisbon, Cod.~Alcobaça CCXC/143},
+ shorttitle = {The Lorv\~ao transcription},
+ journal = {Scriptorium},
+ volume = {51},
+ date = {1997},
+ pages = {51-68},
+ gender = {sf},
+ number = {1},
+ hyphenation = {english},
+ annotation = {Ein englischsprachiger Aufsatz in einer Zeitschrift.
+ Abgesehen davon ein typischer \texttt{article}-Eintrag. Man beachte
+ das Feld \texttt{number} und seine Ausgabe.},
+}
+
+@THESIS{geer,
+ author = {de Geer, Ingrid},
+ title = {Earl, Saint, Bishop, Skald~-- and Music},
+ date = {1985},
+ type = {phdthesis},
+ annotation = {Dies ist ein typischer \texttt{thesis}-Eintrag für eine Dissertationsschrift.
+ Man beachte das Feld \texttt{type} in der \texttt{bib}-Datei, das
+ einen \emph{localization key} enthält.},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ institution = {Uppsala Universitet},
+ location = {Uppsala},
+ subtitle = {The Orkney Earldom of the Twelfth Century. A Musicological Study}
+}
+
+@BOOK{iliad,
+ author = {Homer},
+ title = {Die Ilias},
+ shorttitle = {Ilias},
+ publisher = {Artemis \& Winkler},
+ date = {2004},
+ edition = {3},
+ annotation = {Eine deutsche Übersetzung der \emph{Ilias}. Man beachte die Felder
+ \texttt{translator} und \texttt{introduction}, das Format des \texttt{location}-Felds
+ in der \texttt{bib}-Datei sowie die Felder \texttt{sorttitle} und
+ \texttt{indextitle}.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indextitle = {Ilias, Die},
+ introduction = {Latacz, Joachim},
+ location = {D{\"u}sseldorf and Z{\"u}rich},
+ sorttitle = {Ilias},
+ translator = {Schadewaldt, Wolfgang}
+}
+
+@INBOOK{kant:kpv,
+ author = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ title = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft},
+ shorttitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft},
+ pages = {1--163},
+ bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ publisher = {Walter de Gruyter},
+ date = {1968},
+ annotation = {Eine Edition von Kants Werken, Band 5. Dies ist ein \texttt{inbook}-Eintrag,
+ der sich nur auf die \emph{Kritik der praktischen Vernunft} bezieht,
+ nicht auf den gesamten fünften Band. Man beachte die Felder \texttt{author}
+ und \texttt{bookauthor} in der \texttt{bib}-Datei. In den Standardeinstellungen
+ wird \texttt{bookauthor} ignoriert, falls die Werte der Felder \texttt{author}
+ und \texttt{bookauthor} identisch sind.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe},
+ shorthand = {KpV},
+ volume = {5}
+}
+
+@INBOOK{kant:ku,
+ author = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ title = {Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ pages = {165--485},
+ bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ publisher = {Walter de Gruyter},
+ date = {1968},
+ annotation = {Eine Edition von Kants Werken, Band 5. Dies ist ein \texttt{inbook}-Eintrag,
+ der sich nur auf die \emph{Kritik der Urtheilskraft} bezieht, nicht
+ auf den gesamten fünften Band.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe},
+ shorthand = {KU},
+ volume = {5}
+}
+
+@INREFERENCE{enzensberger,
+ author = {Enzensberger, Horst},
+ title = {Capo Colonne, Schlacht v\adddot},
+ xref = {LMA},
+ volume = {2},
+ date = {1983},
+ location = {München and Zürich},
+ pages = {1484},
+ pagination = {column},
+ bookpagination = {column},
+ booktitle = {Lexikon des Mittelalters},
+ gender = {sm},
+ hyphenation = {ngerman},
+ annotation = {Ein Lexikonartikel, also ein typischer \texttt{inreference}-Eintrag.
+ Zu beachten sind auch die Felder \texttt{xref}, \texttt{pagination} und
+ \texttt{bookpagination}}
+}
+
+@REFERENCE{LMA,
+ title = {Lexikon des Mittelalters},
+ location = {München and Zürich},
+ date = {1980/1999},
+ gender = {pp},
+ hyphenation = {ngerman},
+ volumes = {10},
+ shorthand = {LMA},
+ options = {acronym=true},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{reference}-Eintrag, gedacht für Nachschlagewerke. Intern
+ nichts anderes als ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag. Man beachte auch das Feld
+ \texttt{options}.}
+}
+
+@ONLINE{markey,
+ author = {Markey, Nicolas},
+ title = {Tame the BeaST},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{online}-Eintrag einer Anleitung. Man beachte das Format
+ des \texttt{date}-Feldes (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in der \texttt{bib}-Datei.},
+ date = {2005-10-16},
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ sorttitle = {Tame the Beast},
+ subtitle = {The B to X of \BibTeX},
+ url = {http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf},
+ urldate = {2006-10-01},
+ version = {1.3}
+}
+
+@BOOK{Meisen1931,
+ author = {Meisen, Karl},
+ title = {Nikolauskult und Nikolausbrauch im Abendlande},
+ shorttitle = {Nikolauskult},
+ subtitle = {Eine kultgeographisch-volkskundliche Untersuchung},
+ date = {1981},
+ location = {Düsseldorf},
+ origlocation = {Düsseldorf},
+ origdate = {1931},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag. Man beachte die Felder \texttt{origdate}
+ und \texttt{origlocation}, die dafür sorgen, dass \texttt{date} und \texttt{location}
+ als \enquote*{Nachdruck} erscheinen.},
+ gender = {sm},
+ series = {Forschungen zur Volkskunde},
+ number = {9--12},
+}
+
+@INBOOK{nietzsche:historie,
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ title = {Unzeitgem{\"a}sse Betrachtungen. Zweites St{\"u}ck},
+ shorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie},
+ subtitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben},
+ pages = {243--334},
+ bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ booktitle = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV.
+ Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973},
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ date = {1988},
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ annotation = {Ein einzelner Beitrag aus der kritischen Ausgabe von Nietzsches Werken.
+ Dieser \texttt{inbook}-Eintrag bezieht sich nur auf einen Essay im
+ ersten Band. Man beachte die Felder \texttt{title}, \texttt{booktitle}
+ und \texttt{maintitle} sowie die Felder \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{sortyear}.
+ Dieser Eintrag soll nach dem Eintrag erscheinen, der den gesamten
+ ersten Band wiedergibt.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indexsorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie fur das Leben},
+ indextitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-01-243},
+ sortyear = {1988-01-243},
+ volume = {1}
+}
+
+@BOOK{nietzsche:ksa,
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ title = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ subtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ date = {1988},
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ edition = {2},
+ annotation = {Die kritische Ausgabe von Nietzsches Werken. Dieser \texttt{book}-Eintrag
+ bezieht sich auf die gesamte, 15-bändige Edition. Man beachte das
+ \texttt{volumes}-Feld und das Format der Felder \texttt{publisher}
+ und \texttt{location} in der \texttt{bib}-Datei. Man beachte außerdem
+ die Felder \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{sortyear}, die die Sortierung
+ der Bibliographie beeinflussen.},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indexsorttitle = {Samtliche Werke},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-00-000},
+ sortyear = {1988-00-000},
+ volumes = {15}
+}
+
+@BOOK{nietzsche:ksa1,
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ title = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV.
+ Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973},
+ shorttitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I},
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ date = {1988},
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ edition = {2},
+ annotation = {Ein einzelner Band der kritischen Ausgabe von Nietzsches Werken. Dieser
+ \texttt{book}-Eintrag bezieht sich nur auf den ersten Band. Man beachte
+ die Felder \texttt{title} und \texttt{maintitle} sowie die Felder
+ \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{sortyear}. Dieser Eintrag soll nach
+ dem Eintrag erscheinen, der die gesamte Edition anführt.},
+ bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ indexsorttitle = {Samtliche Werke I},
+ indextitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-01-000},
+ sortyear = {1988-01-000},
+ volume = {1}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{springer,
+ author = {Springer, Otto},
+ title = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes from Scandinavia to Rome},
+ shorttitle = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes},
+ volume = {12},
+ date = {1950},
+ pages = {92--122},
+ annotation = {Ein einfacher \texttt{article}-Eintrag. Man beachte die Felder
+ \texttt{shortjournal} und \texttt{options}},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ journaltitle = {Mediaeval Studies},
+ shortjournal = {Med. Stud\adddot},
+}
+
+@BOOK{vazques-de-parga,
+ author = {V{\'a}zques{ de }Parga, Luis and Lacarra, Jos{\'e} Mar{\'i}a and
+ Ur{\'i}a R{\'i}u, Juan},
+ title = {Las Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela},
+ shorttitle = {Peregrinaciones},
+ publisher = {Iberdrola},
+ date = {1993},
+ note = {Ed. facs. de la realizada en 1948--49},
+ annotation = {Ein mehrbändiges Buch. Dies ist ein \texttt{book}-Eintrag mit den
+ Feldern \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{note}, \texttt{sorttitle} und \texttt{indextitle}.},
+ hyphenation = {spanish},
+ indextitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela, Las},
+ location = {Pamplona},
+ sorttitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela},
+ volumes = {3}
+}
+
+@COLLECTION{Annales-Quedlinburgenses,
+ editor = {Giese, Martina},
+ title = {Die Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+ shorttitle = {Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+ location = {Hannover},
+ date = {2004},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag. Man beachte das Feld \texttt{shorthand}
+ und vergleiche im Sigelverzeichnis. Man beachte außerdem die Option \texttt{citedas}
+ im \texttt{options}-Feld.},
+ gender = {sf},
+ series = {MGH. Scriptores rerum Germanicarum in usum scholarum separatim editi},
+ number = {72},
+ options = {citedas=false},
+ shorthand = {Annales Quedlinburgenses}
+}
+
+@REVIEW{Koerntgen,
+ author = {Körntgen, Ludger},
+ xref = {Annales-Quedlinburgenses},
+ journaltitle = {sehepunkte},
+ volume = {7},
+ number = {3},
+ date = {2007-03-15},
+ url = {http://www.sehepunkte.de/2007/03/8389.html},
+ urldate = {2011-02-06},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{review}-Eintrag. Man beachte das Feld \texttt{xref}.}
+}
+
+@COLLECTION{jaffe,
+ editor = {Jaff{\'e}, Philipp},
+ title = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum ab condita ecclesia ad annum post Christum
+ natum \textsc{mcxcviii}},
+ shorttitle = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum},
+ date = {1885/1888},
+ edition = {2},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag mit den Feldern \texttt{edition} und
+ \texttt{volumes}. Man beachte außerdem die Felder \texttt{editora}, \texttt{editoratype}
+ und \texttt{library}.},
+ library = {Bibliothek: Signatur},
+ location = {Leipzig},
+ editora = {Loewenfeld, Samuel and Kaltenbrunner, Ferdinand and Ewald, Paul},
+ editoratype = {redactor},
+ volumes = {2}
+}
+
+@COLLECTION{britannica,
+ editor = {Preece, Warren E.},
+ title = {The New Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+ publisher = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+ date = {2003},
+ edition = {15},
+ annotation = {Dies ist ein \texttt{collection}-Eintrag für ein Lexikon. Man beachte
+ die \texttt{useeditor}-Option im \texttt{options}-Feld sowie das \texttt{sorttitle}-Feld.
+ Dieser Eintrag soll nach dem Titel einsortiert werden, obwohl es
+ einen Herausgeber gibt. Außerdem soll der Titel unter \enquote*{E}
+ einsortiert werden, nicht unter \enquote*{T}. Man beachte außerdem
+ das \texttt{label}-Feld, das für Autor-Jahr-Stile angegeben wurde.},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ indextitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica, The New},
+ label = {EB},
+ location = {Chicago, Ill.},
+ options = {useeditor=false},
+ sorttitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+ volumes = {32}
+}
+
+@ONLINE{ctan,
+ title = {CTAN},
+ date = {2006},
+ annotation = {Ein \texttt{online}-Eintrag. Der \textsc{url}, der im Feld \texttt{url}
+ steht, wird automatisch in einen Link verwandelt, sofern die \texttt{hyperref}-Unterstützung
+ geladen wurde. Man beachte das Format des \texttt{urldate}-Felds
+ (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in der \texttt{bib}-Datei.
+ Man beachte außerdem das \texttt{label}-Feld, das als \emph{fallback}
+ (Sicherung) von Zitierstilen genutzt werden kann, die die Felder
+ \texttt{author} und\slash oder \texttt{year} bzw. \texttt{date} benötigen.},
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ label = {CTAN},
+ subtitle = {The Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network},
+ url = {http://www.ctan.org},
+ urldate = {2006-10-01}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a,
+ author = {Gerstmann, Günter},
+ title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus},
+ journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel},
+ date = {2007},
+ volume = {42},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {13},
+ issue = {Januar--März},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate},
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{GMG:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate},
+}
+@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950,
+ author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]},
+ title = {Creativity},
+ journal = {The American Psychologist},
+ date = {1950-09},
+ volume = {5},
+ number = {9},
+ pages = {444--454},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Page:1997,
+ author = {Page, Penny Booth},
+ title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies},
+ subtitle = {A critical essay},
+ journal = {Addiction},
+ date = {1997},
+ volume = {92},
+ number = {12},
+ pages = {1619-1637},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906,
+ author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz},
+ title = {Rausch und Kunst},
+ journal = {Blaubuch},
+ date = {1906},
+ volume = {1},
+ pages = {1726-1730},
+ issue = {4. Quartal},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-13},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000,
+ author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.},
+ title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen},
+ journal = {Therapeutische Umschau},
+ date = {2000},
+ volume = {57},
+ pages = {241-245},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930,
+ author = {Chapiro, Joseph},
+ title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}},
+ journal = {Neue Freie Presse},
+ number = {23773},
+ pages = {1-3},
+ issue = {Morgenblatt},
+ date = {1930-11-19},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Barski:2007,
+ author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard},
+ title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick},
+ journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen},
+ date = {2007},
+ number = {119},
+ pages = {62},
+ issue = {IV},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Essig:2005,
+ author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard},
+ title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld},
+ subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung},
+ number = {237},
+ pages = {16},
+ date = {2005-10-14},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007,
+ author = {Kluwe, Sandra},
+ title = {Furor poeticus},
+ subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie
+ der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik
+ Rilkes und Kafkas},
+ journal = {literaturkritik.de},
+ date = {2007-02},
+ number = {2},
+ url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006,
+ author = {Burckhardt, Barbara},
+ title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen},
+ subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger
+ Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber},
+ journal = {Theater heute},
+ date = {2006},
+ number = {5},
+ pages = {14-18},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922,
+ author = {Ossietzky, Carl von},
+ title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater},
+ journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung},
+ date = {1922-03-30},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausgabe},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960,
+ author = {Weiss, Grigorij},
+ title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke},
+ subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ journal = {Sinn und Form},
+ date = {1960},
+ pages = {363--385},
+ issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006,
+ author = {Hofer, Hermann},
+ title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten},
+ subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart
+ Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater},
+ journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten},
+ date = {2006-03-14},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006,
+ author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko},
+ title = {Rose Bernd},
+ journal = {Szene Hamburg},
+ date = {2006-04},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@BOOK{Wulfstan:Homilies,
+ author = {{Wulfstan von York}},
+ title = {The homilies of Wulfstan},
+ location = {London},
+ publisher = {Sandpiper Books},
+ date = {1998},
+ editor = {Bethurum, Dorothy},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ isbn = {0-19-811101-0},
+ options = {oldauthor=true,pseudoauthor=true},
+ origlocation = {Oxford},
+ origdate = {1957},
+ annotation = {Eine Edition von Predigten eines mittelalterlichen Autors. Man beachte das Feld
+ \texttt{options} sowie die Felder \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{origlocation} und \texttt{origdate}.}
+}
+
+@INBOOK{Judic1992,
+ author = {Bruno Judic},
+ title = {Introduction},
+ booktitle = {Régle pastorale},
+ date = {1992},
+ bookauthor = {{Gregor der Große}},
+ editor = {Floribert Rommel},
+ translator = {Charles Morel},
+ commentator = {Bruno Judic},
+ volume = {1},
+ series = {Sources chrétiennes},
+ number = {381},
+ publisher = {Éditions du Cerf},
+ location = {Paris},
+ pages = {15-111},
+ gender = {sm},
+ hyphenation = {french},
+ options = {pseudoauthor=true,oldbookauthor=true},
+ xref = {Regula-Pastoralis},
+ annotation = {Die Einleitung zur Edition eines frühmittelalterlichen Textes.
+ Die Edition hat außerdem einen Herausgeber (\texttt{editor}), einen
+ Übersetzer (\texttt{translator}) und einen Kommentator (\texttt{commentator}).
+ Man beachte die Option \texttt{oldbookauthor} im Feld \texttt{options}.}
+}
+
+@BOOK{Regula-Pastoralis,
+ author = {{Gregor der Große}},
+ title = {Régle pastorale},
+ date = {1992},
+ editor = {Floribert Rommel},
+ translator = {Charles Morel},
+ commentator = {Bruno Judic},
+ introduction = {Bruno Judic},
+ volumes = {2},
+ series = {Sources chrétiennes},
+ number = {381},
+ publisher = {Éditions du Cerf},
+ location = {Paris},
+ gender = {sm},
+ hyphenation = {french},
+ keywords = {Gregor der Große, Regula Pastoralis},
+ options = {pseudoauthor=true,oldauthor=true},
+ annotation = {Die Edition eines frühmittelalterlichen Textes. Die Edition hat
+ einen Herausgeber (\texttt{editor}), einen Übersetzer (\texttt{translator})
+ und einen Kommentator (\texttt{commentator}), der gleichzeitig auch die
+ Einleitung (\texttt{introduction}) geschrieben hat. Man beachte daneben
+ das Feld \texttt{options}.}
+}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-footnote-dw.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-footnote-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d9281cbc54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-footnote-dw.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-footnote-dw.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-footnote-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4ffce5a338
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/de-footnote-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+% v 1.7
+% This file presents the `footnote-dw' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[ngerman]{babel}
+\usepackage[autostyle]{csquotes}
+\usepackage[
+ style=footnote-dw,
+%% biblatex-dw-Optionen %%%
+% acronyms=true,
+% addyear=true,
+ annotation=true,
+% citeauthor=normalfont,%namefontfoot,%namefont,
+% citedas=false,
+% citepages=suppress,%omit,%permit,%separate,
+% edbyidem=false,
+% editorstring=normal,%brackets,
+% edstringincitations=false,
+% edsuper=true,
+% firstfull=true,
+% firstfullname=true,
+% firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% idembib=false,
+% idembibformat=dash,
+% idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% inreference=full,%normal,
+% journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard
+ library=true,
+% namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% nolocation=true,
+% nopublisher=false,
+% oldauthor=false,
+% omiteditor=true,
+% origfields=false,
+% origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct,
+% pagetotal=true,
+% pseudoauthor=false,
+% series=afteryear,
+% shorthandibid=false,
+% shorthandinbib=true,
+% shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em,
+% shortjournal=true,
+% terselos=false,
+% xref=true,
+%% biblatex-Optionen %%%
+% autocite=plain,
+% citetracker=false,
+% doi=true,
+% eprint=true,
+% ibidpage=true,
+% ibidtracker=false,
+% idemtracker=false,
+% isbn=true,
+% pagetracker=false,
+ hyperref,
+ backend=biber
+]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\bibliography{de-examples-dw}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{Der Stil \texttt{footnote-dw}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite}-Beispiele}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{\cite[Siehe][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{\cite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext \parencite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor}- und \cmd{parencite*}-Beispiele}
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[Siehe][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext
+ist \parencite*[Siehe][92--95]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite[Siehe][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite}-Beispiele}
+
+\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist.
+
+\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} zeigt, dass dies nur Fülltext ist.
+
+\footnote{\textcite[Siehe][]{springer} für mehr Fülltext.}
+
+\footnote{\textcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer} für mehr Fülltext.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext \autocite{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{Mehrere Zitate}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\subsection*{Shorthand-Beispiele}
+
+\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses}
+
+\cite[25]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite[noch einmal]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \fullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite}-Beispiele}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{Dies ist nur Fülltext. \footfullcite[Siehe][92--95]{springer}}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\printshorthands
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate]
+
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-authortitle-dw.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-authortitle-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6cee32c20f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-authortitle-dw.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-authortitle-dw.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-authortitle-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0817614375
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-authortitle-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+% v 1.7
+% This file presents the `authortitle-dw' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[british]{babel}
+\usepackage[autostyle]{csquotes}
+\usepackage[
+ style=authortitle-dw,
+%% biblatex-dw-Optionen %%%
+% acronyms=true,
+% addyear=true,
+ annotation=true,
+% citeauthor=normalfont,%namefontfoot,%namefont,
+% citedas=false,
+% citepages=suppress,%omit,%permit,%separate,
+% edbyidem=false,
+% editorstring=normal,%brackets,
+% edstringincitations=false,
+% edsuper=true,
+% firstfull=true,
+% firstfullname=true,
+% firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% idembib=false,
+% idembibformat=dash,
+% idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% inreference=full,%normal,
+% journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard
+ library=true,
+% namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% nolocation=true,
+% nopublisher=false,
+% oldauthor=false,
+% omiteditor=true,
+% origfields=false,
+% origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct,
+% pagetotal=true,
+% pseudoauthor=false,
+% series=afteryear,
+% shorthandibid=false,
+% shorthandinbib=true,
+% shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em,
+% shortjournal=true,
+% terselos=false,
+% xref=true,
+%% biblatex-Optionen %%%
+% autocite=plain,
+% citetracker=false,
+% doi=true,
+% eprint=true,
+% ibidpage=true,
+% ibidtracker=false,
+% idemtracker=false,
+% isbn=true,
+% pagetracker=false,
+ hyperref,
+ backend=biber
+]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\bibliography{examples-dw}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{authortitle-dw} style}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[See][]{springer}
+
+\cite[See][59--63]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[See][]{springer}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[See][59--63]{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor} and \cmd{parencite*} examples}
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[See][]{springer}.
+
+\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[See][59--63]{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[See][]{springer}
+
+This is just filler text.\footcite[See][59--63]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite} examples}
+
+\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[See][]{springer} for more filler text.
+
+\textcite[See][59--63]{springer} for more filler text.
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\subsection*{Shorthand examples}
+
+\cite{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite[again]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite{kant:ku}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][]{springer}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][92--95]{springer}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][]{springer}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][92--95]{springer}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\printshorthands
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-footnote-dw.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-footnote-dw.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4b4b7c95f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-footnote-dw.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-footnote-dw.tex b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-footnote-dw.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e2b6604313
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/en-footnote-dw.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+% v 1.7
+% This file presents the `footnote-dw' style
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[british]{babel}
+\usepackage[autostyle]{csquotes}
+\usepackage[
+ style=footnote-dw,
+ %useeditor=true,
+%% biblatex-dw-Optionen %%%
+% acronyms=true,
+ annotation=true,
+% citeauthor=normalfont,%namefontfoot,%namefont,
+% citedas=false,
+% citepages=suppress,%omit,%permit,%separate,
+% edbyidem=false,
+% editorstring=normal,%brackets,
+% edstringincitations=false,
+% edsuper=true,
+% firstfullname=true,
+% firstnamefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% ibidemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% idembib=false,
+% idembibformat=dash,
+% idemfont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% inreference=full,%normal,
+% journalnumber=afteryear,%date,%standard
+ library=true,
+% namefont=smallcaps,%italic,%bold,
+% nolocation=true,
+% nopublisher=false,
+% oldauthor=false,
+% omiteditor=true,
+% origfields=false,
+% origfieldsformat=parens,%brackets,%punct,
+% pagetotal=true,
+% pseudoauthor=false,
+% series=afteryear,
+% shorthandibid=false,
+% shorthandinbib=true,
+% shorthandwidth=40pt,%3em,
+% shortjournal=true,
+% terselos=false,
+% xref=true,
+%% biblatex-Optionen %%%
+% autocite=plain,
+% citetracker=false,
+% doi=true,
+% eprint=true,
+% ibidpage=true,
+% ibidtracker=false,
+% idemtracker=false,
+% isbn=true,
+% pagetracker=false,
+ hyperref,
+ backend=biber
+]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\bibliography{examples-dw}
+% Some generic settings:
+\newcommand{\cmd}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\usepackage{xcolor}
+\newcommand{\option}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\section*{The \texttt{footnote-dw} style}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{cite} examples}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\cite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{\cite[See][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{\cite[See][59--63]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{parencite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \parencite{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+This is just filler text \parencite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text \parencite[See][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text \parencite[See][59--63]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{citeauthor} and \cmd{parencite*} examples}
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\citeauthor{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}.
+
+\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[See][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{\citeauthor{springer} shows that this is just filler
+text \parencite*[See][59--63]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \footcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \footcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \footcite[See][]{springer}}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \footcite[See][59--63]{springer}}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{textcite} examples}
+
+\textcite{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\textcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric} shows that this is just filler text.
+
+\footnote{\textcite[See][]{springer} for more filler text.}
+
+\footnote{\textcite[See][59--63]{springer} for more filler text.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{autocite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text \autocite{springer}.
+
+\subsection*{Multiple citations}
+
+\cite{aristotle:rhetoric,aristotle:physics,aristotle:poetics}
+
+\subsection*{Shorthand examples}
+
+\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses}
+
+\cite[25]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite[again]{kant:kpv}
+
+\cite{Annales-Quedlinburgenses}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{fullcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \fullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \fullcite[See][92--95]{springer}.}
+
+\subsection*{\cmd{footfullcite} examples}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+This is just filler text. \footfullcite[59]{aristotle:rhetoric}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][]{springer}.}
+
+\footnote{This is just filler text. \footfullcite[See][92--95]{springer}.}
+
+\clearpage
+
+\printshorthands
+
+\nocite{*}
+\printbibliography[notkeyword=journalnumberdate]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/examples-dw.bib b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/examples-dw.bib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e047607501
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/doc/examples/examples-dw.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,840 @@
+@PREAMBLE{ "\providecommand*{\BibTeX}{Bib\TeX} " }
+@STRING{cup = "Cambridge University Press" }
+@STRING{dtv = "Deutscher Taschenbuch-Verlag" }
+
+@Article{angenendt,
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {Angenendt, Arnold},
+ indextitle = {In Honore Salvatoris},
+ title = {In Honore Salvatoris~-- Vom Sinn und Unsinn der Patrozinienkunde},
+ shorttitle = {In Honore Salvatoris},
+ journaltitle = {Revue d'Histoire Eccl{\'e}siastique},
+ volume = {97},
+ date = {2002},
+ pages = {431--456, 791--823},
+ annotation = {A German article in a French journal. Apart from that, a typical
+ \texttt{article} entry. Note the \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{library}, \texttt{shortjournal}
+ and \texttt{options} fields},
+ shortjournal = {RHE},
+ options = {acronym=true},
+ library = {Here is room for some notes regarding the library in which the work is available}
+}
+
+@Article{springer,
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ author = {Springer, Otto},
+ title = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes from Scandinavia to Rome},
+ shorttitle = {Mediaeval Pilgrim Routes},
+ journaltitle = {Mediaeval Studies},
+ volume = {12},
+ date = {1950},
+ pages = {92--122},
+ annotation = {A plain \texttt{article} entry. Note the field \texttt{shortjournal}.},
+ shortjournal = {Med.\ Stud\adddot}
+}
+
+@Book{aristotle:anima,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ author = {Aristotle},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ editor = {Hicks, Robert Drew},
+ title = {De Anima},
+ publisher = cup,
+ location = {Cambridge},
+ date = {1907},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with an \texttt{author} and an \texttt{editor}}
+}
+
+@Book{aristotle:physics,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ author = {Aristotle},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ translator = {Wicksteed, P. H. and Cornford, F. M.},
+ title = {Physics},
+ shorttitle = {Physics},
+ publisher = {G. P. Putnam},
+ location = {New York},
+ date = {1929},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{translator} field}
+}
+
+@Book{aristotle:poetics,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ author = {Aristotle},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ editor = {Lucas, D. W.},
+ title = {Poetics},
+ shorttitle = {Poetics},
+ series = {Clarendon Aristotle},
+ publisher = {Clarendon Press},
+ location = {Oxford},
+ date = {1968},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with an \texttt{author} and an \texttt{editor} as well as
+ a \texttt{series} field}
+}
+
+@Book{aristotle:rhetoric,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ author = {Aristotle},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ editor = {Cope, Edward Meredith},
+ commentator = {Cope, Edward Meredith},
+ sorttitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle},
+ indextitle = {Rhetoric of Aristotle, The},
+ title = {The Rhetoric of Aristotle with a commentary by the late Edward Meredith Cope},
+ shorttitle = {Rhetoric},
+ volumes = {3},
+ publisher = cup,
+ date = {1877},
+ annotation = {A commented edition. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and
+ \texttt{commentator} fields as well as the \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{sorttitle},
+ and \texttt{indextitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Book{averroes/bland,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ author = {Averroes},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ editor = {Bland, Kalman P.},
+ translator = {Bland, Kalman P.},
+ indextitle = {Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction, The},
+ title = {The Epistle on the Possibility of Conjunction with the Active Intellect by Ibn
+ Rushd with the Commentary of Moses Narboni},
+ shorttitle = {Possibility of Conjunction},
+ series = {Moreshet Studies in Jewish History, Literature and Thought},
+ number = {7},
+ publisher = {Jewish Theological Seminary of America},
+ location = {New York},
+ date = {1982},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry with a \texttt{series} and a \texttt{number}. Note the
+ concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and \texttt{translator} fields as well as
+ the \texttt{indextitle} field}
+}
+
+@Book{averroes/hannes,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {Averroes},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ editor = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+ translator = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+ annotator = {Hannes, Ludwig},
+ sorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ indexsorttitle = {Uber die Moglichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ indextitle = {{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ title = {Des Averro{\"e}s Abhandlung: \enquote{{\"U}ber die M{\"o}glichkeit der
+ Conjunktion} oder \enquote{{\"U}ber den materiellen Intellekt}},
+ shorttitle = {M{\"o}glichkeit der Conjunktion},
+ publisher = {C.~A. Kaemmerer},
+ location = {Halle an der Saale},
+ date = {1892},
+ annotation = {An annotated edition. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor},
+ \texttt{translator}, and \texttt{annotator} fields. Also note the
+ \texttt{shorttitle}, \texttt{indextitle}, \texttt{sorttitle}, and
+ \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Book{averroes/hercz,
+ keywords = {primary},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {Averroes},
+ options = {oldauthor},
+ editor = {Hercz, J.},
+ translator = {Hercz, J.},
+ indexsorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen uber die Conjunction},
+ indextitle = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction},
+ title = {Drei Abhandlungen {\"u}ber die Conjunction des separaten Intellects mit dem
+ Menschen},
+ subtitle = {Von Averroes (Vater und Sohn), aus dem Arabischen {\"u}bersetzt von Samuel Ibn
+ Tibbon},
+ shorttitle = {Drei Abhandlungen},
+ publisher = {S.~Hermann},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ date = {1869},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry. Note the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and
+ \texttt{translator} fields as well as the \texttt{indextitle} and
+ \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Book{cicero,
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {Cicero, Marcus Tullius},
+ editor = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula},
+ translator = {Blank-Sangmeister, Ursula},
+ afterword = {Thraede, Klaus},
+ indextitle = {De natura deorum},
+ title = {De natura deorum. {\"U}ber das Wesen der G{\"o}tter},
+ shorttitle = {De natura deorum},
+ language = {langlatin and langgerman},
+ publisher = {Reclam},
+ location = {Stuttgart},
+ date = {1995},
+ annotation = {A bilingual edition of Cicero's \emph{De natura deorum}, with a German
+ translation. Note the format of the \texttt{language} field in the database
+ file, the concatenation of the \texttt{editor} and \texttt{translator} fields,
+ and the \texttt{afterword} field}
+}
+
+@Article{duggan,
+ author = {Duggan, Anne J.},
+ title = {The Lorv\~ao transcription of Benedict of Peterborough's \emph{Liber
+ miraculorum beati Thome}: Lisbon, Cod.~Alcobaça CCXC/143},
+ shorttitle = {The Lorv\~ao transcription},
+ journal = {Scriptorium},
+ volume = {51},
+ date = {1997},
+ pages = {51-68},
+ gender = {sf},
+ number = {1},
+ hyphenation = {english},
+ annotation = {A typical \texttt{article} entry. Note the field
+ \texttt{number}.},
+}
+
+@Book{iliad,
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {Homer},
+ translator = {Schadewaldt, Wolfgang},
+ introduction = {Latacz, Joachim},
+ sorttitle = {Ilias},
+ indextitle = {Ilias, Die},
+ title = {Die Ilias},
+ shorttitle = {Ilias},
+ edition = {3},
+ publisher = {Artemis \& Winkler},
+ location = {D{\"u}sseldorf and Z{\"u}rich},
+ date = {2004},
+ annotation = {A German translation of the \emph{Iliad}. Note the \texttt{translator} and
+ \texttt{introduction} fields and the format of the \texttt{location} field in
+ the database file. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{indextitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Book{nietzsche:ksa,
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ sortyear = {1988-00-000},
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-00-000},
+ indexsorttitle = {Samtliche Werke},
+ title = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ subtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ volumes = {15},
+ edition = {2},
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ date = {1988},
+ annotation = {The critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This is a \texttt{book} entry
+ referring to a 15-volume work as a whole. Note the \texttt{volumes} field and
+ the format of the \texttt{publisher} and \texttt{location} fields in the
+ database file. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields
+ which are used to fine-tune the sorting order of the bibliography. We want this
+ item listed first in the bibliography}
+}
+
+@Book{nietzsche:ksa1,
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ sortyear = {1988-01-000},
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-01-000},
+ indexsorttitle = {Samtliche Werke I},
+ indextitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I},
+ title = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV.
+ Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973},
+ shorttitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke I},
+ maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ volume = {1},
+ edition = {2},
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ date = {1988},
+ annotation = {A single volume from the critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This
+ \texttt{book} entry explicitly refers to the first volume only. Note the
+ \texttt{title} and \texttt{maintitle} fields. Also note the \texttt{sorttitle}
+ and \texttt{sortyear} fields. We want this entry to be listed after the entry
+ referring to the entire edition}
+}
+
+@Book{vazques-de-parga,
+ hyphenation = {spanish},
+ author = {V{\'a}zques{ de }Parga, Luis and Lacarra, Jos{\'e} Mar{\'i}a and Ur{\'i}a
+ R{\'i}u, Juan},
+ sorttitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela},
+ indextitle = {Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela, Las},
+ title = {Las Peregrinaciones a Santiago de Compostela},
+ shorttitle = {Peregrinaciones},
+ volumes = {3},
+ publisher = {Iberdrola},
+ location = {Pamplona},
+ date = {1993},
+ note = {Ed. facs. de la realizada en 1948--49},
+ annotation = {A multivolume book cited as a whole. This is a \texttt{book} entry with
+ \texttt{volumes}, \texttt{note}, \texttt{sorttitle}, and \texttt{indextitle} fields}
+}
+
+@Collection{britannica,
+ options = {useeditor=false},
+ label = {EB},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ editor = {Preece, Warren E.},
+ sorttitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+ indextitle = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica, The New},
+ title = {The New Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+ volumes = {32},
+ edition = {15},
+ publisher = {Encyclop{\ae}dia Britannica},
+ location = {Chicago, Ill.},
+ date = {2003},
+ annotation = {This is a \texttt{collection} entry for an encyclopedia. Note the
+ \texttt{useeditor} option in the \texttt{options} field as well as the
+ \texttt{sorttitle} field. We want this entry to be cited and alphabetized by
+ title even though there is an editor. In addition to that, we want the title to
+ be alphabetized under \enquote*{E} rather than \enquote*{T}. Also note the
+ \texttt{label} field which is provided for author-year citation styles}
+}
+
+@Collection{jaffe,
+ editor = {Jaff{\'e}, Philipp},
+ editora = {Loewenfeld, Samuel and Kaltenbrunner, Ferdinand and Ewald, Paul},
+ editoratype = {redactor},
+ title = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum ab condita ecclesia ad annum post Christum natum
+ \textsc{mcxcviii}},
+ shorttitle = {Regesta Pontificum Romanorum},
+ volumes = {2},
+ edition = {2},
+ location = {Leipzig},
+ date = {1885/1888},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{collection} entry with \texttt{edition} and \texttt{volumes} fields.
+ Note the \texttt{editora}, \texttt{editoratype} and \texttt{library} fields},
+ library = {Library: Shelfmark}
+}
+
+@InBook{kant:kpv,
+ shorthand = {KpV},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ title = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft},
+ shorttitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft},
+ booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe},
+ volume = {5},
+ publisher = {Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ date = {1968},
+ pages = {1--163},
+ annotation = {An edition of Kant's \emph{Collected Works}, volume five. This is an
+ \texttt{inbook} entry which explicitly refers to the \emph{Critique of Practical
+ Reason} only, not to the entire fifth volume. Note the \texttt{author} and
+ \texttt{bookauthor} fields in the database file. By default, the
+ \texttt{bookauthor} is omitted if the values of the \texttt{author} and
+ \texttt{bookauthor} fields are identical}
+}
+
+@InBook{kant:ku,
+ shorthand = {KU},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ bookauthor = {Kant, Immanuel},
+ title = {Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ booktitle = {Kritik der praktischen Vernunft. Kritik der Urtheilskraft},
+ maintitle = {Kants Werke. Akademie Textausgabe},
+ volume = {5},
+ publisher = {Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {Berlin},
+ date = {1968},
+ pages = {165--485},
+ annotation = {An edition of Kant's \emph{Collected Works}, volume five. This is an
+ \texttt{inbook} entry which explicitly refers to the \emph{Critique of Judgment}
+ only, not to the entire fifth volume}
+}
+
+@InBook{nietzsche:historie,
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ sortyear = {1988-01-243},
+ author = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ bookauthor = {Nietzsche, Friedrich},
+ editor = {Colli, Giorgio and Montinari, Mazzino},
+ sorttitle = {Werke-01-243},
+ indexsorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie fur das Leben},
+ indextitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben},
+ title = {Unzeitgem{\"a}sse Betrachtungen. Zweites St{\"u}ck},
+ subtitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie f{\"u}r das Leben},
+ shorttitle = {Vom Nutzen und Nachtheil der Historie},
+ booktitle = {Die Geburt der Trag{\"o}die. Unzeitgem{\"a}{\ss}e Betrachtungen I--IV.
+ Nachgelassene Schriften 1870--1973},
+ maintitle = {S{\"a}mtliche Werke},
+ mainsubtitle = {Kritische Studienausgabe},
+ volume = {1},
+ publisher = dtv # { and Walter de Gruyter},
+ location = {M{\"u}nchen and Berlin and New York},
+ date = {1988},
+ pages = {243--334},
+ annotation = {A single essay from the critical edition of Nietzsche's works. This
+ \texttt{inbook} entry explicitly refers to an essay found in the first volume.
+ Note the \texttt{title}, \texttt{booktitle}, and \texttt{maintitle} fields. Also
+ note the \texttt{sorttitle} and \texttt{sortyear} fields. We want this entry to
+ be listed after the entry referring to the entire first volume}
+}
+
+@InCollection{brandt,
+ options = {useprefix=false},
+ hyphenation = {german},
+ author = {von Brandt, Ahasver and Erich Hoffmann},
+ editor = {Ferdinand Seibt},
+ indexsorttitle = {Nordischen Lander von der Mitte des 11. Jahrhunderts bis 1448},
+ indextitle = {Nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis 1448, Die},
+ title = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder von der Mitte des 11.~Jahrhunderts bis 1448},
+ shorttitle = {Die nordischen L{\"a}nder},
+ booktitle = {Europa im Hoch- und Sp{\"a}tmittelalter},
+ series = {Handbuch der europ{\"a}ischen Geschichte},
+ number = {2},
+ publisher = {Klett-Cotta},
+ location = {Stuttgart},
+ date = {1987},
+ pages = {884--917},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{incollection} entry with a \texttt{series} and a \texttt{number}.
+ Note the format of the printed name and compare the \texttt{useprefix} option in
+ the \texttt{options} field. Also
+ note the \texttt{indextitle, and \texttt{indexsorttitle} fields}}
+}
+
+@Online{ctan,
+ label = {CTAN},
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ title = {CTAN},
+ subtitle = {The Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network},
+ date = {2006},
+ url = {http://www.ctan.org},
+ urldate = {2006-10-01},
+ annotation = {This is an \texttt{online} entry. The \textsc{url}, which is given in the
+ \texttt{url} field, is transformed into a clickable link if \texttt{hyperref}
+ support has been enabled. Note the format of the \texttt{urldate} field
+ (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in the database file.
+ Also note the \texttt{label} field which may be used as a fallback by citation
+ styles which need an \texttt{author} and\slash or a \texttt{year}}
+}
+
+@Online{markey,
+ hyphenation = {american},
+ author = {Markey, Nicolas},
+ sorttitle = {Tame the Beast},
+ title = {Tame the BeaST},
+ subtitle = {The B to X of \BibTeX},
+ version = {1.3},
+ date = {2005-10-16},
+ url = {http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf},
+ urldate = {2006-10-01},
+ annotation = {An \texttt{online} entry for a tutorial. Note the format of the \texttt{date}
+ field (\texttt{yyyy-mm-dd}) in the database file.}
+}
+
+@Thesis{geer,
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ author = {de Geer, Ingrid},
+ title = {Earl, Saint, Bishop, Skald~-- and Music},
+ subtitle = {The Orkney Earldom of the Twelfth Century. A Musicological Study},
+ institution = {Uppsala Universitet},
+ type = {phdthesis},
+ location = {Uppsala},
+ date = {1985},
+ annotation = {This is a typical \texttt{thesis} entry for a PhD thesis. Note the
+ \texttt{type} field in the database file which uses a localization key.}
+}
+
+@COLLECTION{Annales-Quedlinburgenses,
+ editor = {Giese, Martina},
+ title = {Die Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+ shorttitle = {Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+ location = {Hannover},
+ date = {2004},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{collection} entry. Note the \texttt{shorthand} field and compare
+ the List of Shorthands. Not also the \texttt{citedas} option in the \texttt{options}
+ field},
+ gender = {sf},
+ series = {MGH. Scriptores rerum Germanicarum in usum scholarum separatim editi},
+ number = {72},
+ file = {dMGH:http\://www.dmgh.de/dmghband.html?bsbbandname=00000719&frameaction=bandansicht:URL},
+ keywords = {Quelle, Deutsches Reich, 10. Jahrhundert, 11. Jahrhundert},
+ shorthand = {Annales Quedlinburgenses},
+ options = {citedas=false}
+}
+
+@REVIEW{Koerntgen,
+ author = {Körntgen, Ludger},
+ xref = {Annales-Quedlinburgenses},
+ journaltitle = {sehepunkte},
+ volume = {7},
+ number = {3},
+ date = {2007-03-15},
+ url = {http://www.sehepunkte.de/2007/03/8389.html},
+ urldate = {2011-02-06},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{review} entry. Note the \texttt{xref} field.}
+}
+
+@BOOK{Meisen1931,
+ author = {Meisen, Karl},
+ title = {Nikolauskult und Nikolausbrauch im Abendlande},
+ shorttitle = {Nikolauskult},
+ subtitle = {Eine kultgeographisch-volkskundliche Untersuchung},
+ origlocation = {Düsseldorf},
+ origdate = {1931},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{book} entry. Note the \texttt{origdate} and \texttt{origlocation}
+ fields and the \enquote*{reprint} output},
+ gender = {sm},
+ series = {Forschungen zur Volkskunde},
+ number = {9--12},
+ location = {Düsseldorf},
+ date = {1981}
+}
+
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939a,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Gerstmann:2007a,
+ author = {Gerstmann, Günter},
+ title = {Gerhart Hauptmann-Aktivitäten in Hohenhaus},
+ journal = {Schlesischer Kulturspiegel},
+ date = {2007},
+ volume = {42},
+ number = {1},
+ pages = {13},
+ issue = {Januar--März},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate},
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{GMG:1939,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate},
+}
+@ARTICLE{Guilford:1950,
+ author = {Guilford, J[oy] P[aul]},
+ title = {Creativity},
+ journal = {The American Psychologist},
+ date = {1950-09},
+ volume = {5},
+ number = {9},
+ pages = {444--454},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Page:1997,
+ author = {Page, Penny Booth},
+ title = {E.\,M. Jellinek and the evolution of alcohol studies},
+ subtitle = {A critical essay},
+ journal = {Addiction},
+ date = {1997},
+ volume = {92},
+ number = {12},
+ pages = {1619-1637},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939b,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-06},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939c,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ issue = {Morgen-Ausg\adddot},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Ewers:1906,
+ author = {Ewers, Hanns Heinz},
+ title = {Rausch und Kunst},
+ journal = {Blaubuch},
+ date = {1906},
+ volume = {1},
+ pages = {1726-1730},
+ issue = {4. Quartal},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939d,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03-13},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939e,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ volume = {91},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Landolt:2000,
+ author = {Landolt, H. P. and Borbély, A. A.},
+ title = {Alkohol und Schlafstörungen},
+ journal = {Therapeutische Umschau},
+ date = {2000},
+ volume = {57},
+ pages = {241-245},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Chapiro:1930,
+ author = {Chapiro, Joseph},
+ title = {Das neueste Werk Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ subtitle = {\enquote{Die Spitzhacke}},
+ journal = {Neue Freie Presse},
+ number = {23773},
+ pages = {1-3},
+ issue = {Morgenblatt},
+ date = {1930-11-19},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939f,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ number = {65},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Barski:2007,
+ author = {Barski, Jacek and Mahnken, Gerhard},
+ title = {Museumsverbund Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ subtitle = {Ein deutsch-polnisches Kulturprojekt mit Weitblick},
+ journal = {Kulturpolitische Mitteilungen},
+ date = {2007},
+ number = {119},
+ pages = {62},
+ issue = {IV},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Essig:2005,
+ author = {Essig, Rolf-Bernhard},
+ title = {Mit liebender Schafsgeduld},
+ subtitle = {Erhart Kästner im Dienste Gerhart Hauptmanns},
+ journal = {Süddeutsche Zeitung},
+ number = {237},
+ pages = {16},
+ date = {2005-10-14},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Kluwe:2007,
+ author = {Kluwe, Sandra},
+ title = {Furor poeticus},
+ subtitle = {Ansätze zu einer neurophysiologisch fundierten Theorie
+ der literarischen Kreativität am Beispiel der Produktionsästhetik
+ Rilkes und Kafkas},
+ journal = {literaturkritik.de},
+ date = {2007-02},
+ number = {2},
+ url = {http://literaturkritik.de/public/rezension.php?rez_id=10438},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Burckhardt:2006,
+ author = {Burckhardt, Barbara},
+ title = {Frauen sind einfach klüger, starke Frauen},
+ subtitle = {Michael Thalheimers \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger
+ Thalia Theater und Schirin Khodadadians Kasseler Räuber},
+ journal = {Theater heute},
+ date = {2006},
+ number = {5},
+ pages = {14-18},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Ossietzky:1922,
+ author = {Ossietzky, Carl von},
+ title = {Moritz Heimann \enquote{Armand Carrel} Staatstheater},
+ journal = {Berliner Volks-Zeitung},
+ date = {1922-03-30},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausg\adddot},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939g,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ issue = {Abend-Ausgabe},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939-03},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@ARTICLE{Weiss:1960,
+ author = {Weiss, Grigorij},
+ title = {Auf der Suche nach der versunkenen Glocke},
+ subtitle = {Johannes R. Becher bei Gerhart Hauptmann},
+ journal = {Sinn und Form},
+ date = {1960},
+ pages = {363--385},
+ issue = {Zweites Sonderheft Johannes R. Becher},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Hofer:2006,
+ author = {Hofer, Hermann},
+ title = {Der Schrei der Verwundeten},
+ subtitle = {Erschütternd: Gerhart
+ Hauptmanns \enquote{Rose Bernd} am Hamburger Thalia Theater},
+ journal = {Lübecker Nachrichten},
+ date = {2006-03-14},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+@ARTICLE{Kammerhoff:2006,
+ author = {Kammerhoff, Heiko},
+ title = {Rose Bernd},
+ journal = {Szene Hamburg},
+ date = {2006-04},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}
+}
+
+@ARTICLE{Fingiert:1939h,
+ author = {Anonym},
+ title = {Gegen Mißbrauch der Genußgifte},
+ journal = {Hannoverscher Kurier},
+ pages = {2},
+ date = {1939},
+ keywords = {journalnumberdate}}
+
+@INREFERENCE{enzensberger,
+ author = {Enzensberger, Horst},
+ title = {Capo Colonne, Schlacht v\adddot},
+ xref = {LMA},
+ volume = {2},
+ date = {1983},
+ location = {München and Zürich},
+ pages = {1484},
+ pagination = {column},
+ bookpagination = {column},
+ booktitle = {Lexikon des Mittelalters},
+ gender = {sm},
+ hyphenation = {ngerman},
+ annotation = {An article in a work of reference (e.g. in an
+ encyclopedia or in a dictionary), thus a typical \texttt{inreference} entry.
+ Note also the fields \texttt{xref}, \texttt{pagination} and
+ \texttt{bookpagination}}
+}
+
+@REFERENCE{LMA,
+ title = {Lexikon des Mittelalters},
+ location = {München and Zürich},
+ date = {1980/1999},
+ gender = {pp},
+ hyphenation = {ngerman},
+ volumes = {10},
+ shorthand = {LMA},
+ options = {acronym=true},
+ annotation = {A \texttt{reference} entry. This entry type is meant for works of reference, e.g.
+ encyclopedias or dictionaries. Internally, it is just an alias for a \texttt{collection} entry.
+ Note also the field \texttt{options}.}
+}
+
+@BOOK{Wulfstan:Homilies,
+ author = {{Wulfstan of York}},
+ title = {The homilies of Wulfstan},
+ location = {London},
+ publisher = {Sandpiper Books},
+ date = {1998},
+ editor = {Bethurum, Dorothy},
+ hyphenation = {british},
+ isbn = {0-19-811101-0},
+ options = {oldauthor=true,pseudoauthor=true},
+ origlocation = {Oxford},
+ origdate = {1957},
+ annotation = {An edition of homilies by one medieval author. Note the \texttt{options} field
+ as well as the fields \texttt{isbn}, \texttt{origlocation} and \texttt{origdate}.}
+}
+
+@INBOOK{Judic1992,
+ author = {Bruno Judic},
+ title = {Introduction},
+ booktitle = {Régle pastorale},
+ date = {1992},
+ bookauthor = {{Gregor der Große}},
+ editor = {Floribert Rommel},
+ translator = {Charles Morel},
+ commentator = {Bruno Judic},
+ volume = {1},
+ series = {Sources chrétiennes},
+ number = {381},
+ publisher = {Éditions du Cerf},
+ location = {Paris},
+ pages = {15-111},
+ gender = {sm},
+ hyphenation = {french},
+ options = {pseudoauthor=true,oldbookauthor=true},
+ xref = {Regula-Pastoralis},
+ annotation = {The introduction to an edition of an early medieval text.
+ The edition features an \texttt{editor}, a \texttt{translator} and a
+ \texttt{commentator}. Note also the option \texttt{oldbookauthor} inside
+ the \texttt{options} field.}
+}
+
+@BOOK{Regula-Pastoralis,
+ author = {{Gregor der Große}},
+ title = {Régle pastorale},
+ date = {1992},
+ editor = {Floribert Rommel},
+ translator = {Charles Morel},
+ commentator = {Bruno Judic},
+ introduction = {Bruno Judic},
+ volumes = {2},
+ series = {Sources chrétiennes},
+ number = {381},
+ publisher = {Éditions du Cerf},
+ location = {Paris},
+ gender = {sm},
+ hyphenation = {french},
+ keywords = {Gregor der Große, Regula Pastoralis},
+ options = {pseudoauthor=true,oldauthor=true},
+ annotation = {The edition of an early medieval text with an \texttt{editor},
+ a \texttt{translator} and a \texttt{commentator} who also wrote an
+ \texttt{introduction}. Note also the \texttt{options} field.}
+} \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/authortitle-dw.bbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/authortitle-dw.bbx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..075131d4ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/authortitle-dw.bbx
@@ -0,0 +1,914 @@
+% authortitle-dw.bbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016
+
+\ProvidesFile{authortitle-dw.bbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex bibliography style]
+
+\RequireBibliographyStyle{standard-dw}
+
+\newbool{bbx:annotation}
+\newbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+\newbool{bbx:editorstring}% Test, ob editorstring auf parens oder brackets gesetzt wurde
+\newbool{bbx:editionstring}
+\newbool{bbx:edsuper}
+\newbool{bbx:idembib}
+\newbool{bbx:idemfont}% Test, ob idemfont gesetzt wurde
+\newbool{bbx:library}
+\newbool{bbx:nolocation}
+\newbool{bbx:nopublisher}
+\newbool{bbx:oldauthor}
+\newbool{bbx:origfields}
+\newbool{bbx:pseudoauthor}
+\newbool{oldbookauthor}
+\newbool{oldauthor}
+\newbool{pseudoauthor}
+
+\DeclareEntryOption{oldbookauthor}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{oldbookauthor}}
+\DeclareEntryOption{oldauthor}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{oldauthor}}
+\DeclareEntryOption{pseudoauthor}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{pseudoauthor}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{annotation}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:annotation}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{edbyidem}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:edbyidem}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{editionstring}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:editionstring}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{edsuper}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:edsuper}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{idembib}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:idembib}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{library}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:library}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{nolocation}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:nolocation}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{nopublisher}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:nopublisher}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{oldauthor}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:oldauthor}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{origfields}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:origfields}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{pseudoauthor}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:pseudoauthor}}
+
+\newcommand{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{origfieldsformat}{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{#1}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{namefont}[normal]{%
+ \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@namefont@#1}
+ {\csuse{bbx@opt@namefont@#1}}
+ {\blxdw@error{%
+ Invalid option 'namefont=#1'\MessageBreak
+ Valid values are 'normal', 'smallcaps', 'italic', 'bold'}}}
+\newcommand{\bbx@namefont}{}
+\def\bbx@opt@namefont@normal{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@namefont}{}}
+\def\bbx@opt@namefont@smallcaps{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@namefont}{\textsc}}
+\def\bbx@opt@namefont@italic{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@namefont}{\mkbibemph}}
+\def\bbx@opt@namefont@bold{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@namefont}{\mkbibbold}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{firstnamefont}[normal]{%
+ \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@firstnamefont@#1}
+ {\csuse{bbx@opt@firstnamefont@#1}}
+ {\blxdw@error{%
+ Invalid option 'firstnamefont=#1'\MessageBreak
+ Valid values are 'normal', 'smallcaps', 'italic', 'bold'}}}
+\newcommand{\bbx@firstnamefont}{}
+\def\bbx@opt@firstnamefont@normal{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@firstnamefont}{}}
+\def\bbx@opt@firstnamefont@smallcaps{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@firstnamefont}{\textsc}}
+\def\bbx@opt@firstnamefont@italic{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@firstnamefont}{\mkbibemph}}
+\def\bbx@opt@firstnamefont@bold{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@firstnamefont}{\mkbibbold}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{idemfont}[normal]{%
+ \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@idemfont@#1}
+ {\csuse{bbx@opt@idemfont@#1}}
+ {\blxdw@error{%
+ Invalid option 'idemfont=#1'\MessageBreak
+ Valid values are 'normal', 'smallcaps', 'italic', 'bold'}}}
+\newcommand{\bbx@idemfont}{}
+\def\bbx@opt@idemfont@normal{%
+ \global\booltrue{bbx:idemfont}%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@idemfont}{}}
+\def\bbx@opt@idemfont@smallcaps{%
+ \global\booltrue{bbx:idemfont}%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@idemfont}{\textsc}}
+\def\bbx@opt@idemfont@italic{%
+ \global\booltrue{bbx:idemfont}%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@idemfont}{\mkbibemph}}
+\def\bbx@opt@idemfont@bold{%
+ \global\booltrue{bbx:idemfont}%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@idemfont}{\mkbibbold}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{ibidemfont}[normal]{%
+ \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@ibidemfont@#1}
+ {\csuse{bbx@opt@ibidemfont@#1}}
+ {\blxdw@error{%
+ Invalid option 'ibidemfont=#1'\MessageBreak
+ Valid values are 'normal', 'smallcaps', 'italic', 'bold'}}}
+\newcommand{\bbx@ibidemfont}{}
+\def\bbx@opt@ibidemfont@normal{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@ibidemfont}{}}
+\def\bbx@opt@ibidemfont@smallcaps{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@ibidemfont}{\textsc}}
+\def\bbx@opt@ibidemfont@italic{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@ibidemfont}{\mkbibemph}}
+\def\bbx@opt@ibidemfont@bold{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@ibidemfont}{\mkbibbold}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{idembibformat}[idem]{%
+ \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@idembibformat@#1}
+ {\csuse{bbx@opt@idembibformat@#1}}
+ {\blxdw@error{%
+ Invalid option 'idembibformat=#1'\MessageBreak
+ Valid values are 'idem', 'dash'}}}
+\def\bbx@opt@idembibformat@idem{%
+ \let\bibnamedashOrig\bibnamedash
+ \AtBeginBibliography{
+ \renewcommand*{\bibnamedash}{%
+ \bibsentence\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}}}}
+\def\bbx@opt@idembibformat@dash{
+ \AtBeginBibliography{%
+ \let\bibnamedash\bibnamedashOrig}}%
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{editorstring}[normal]{%
+ \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@editorstring@#1}
+ {\csuse{bbx@opt@editorstring@#1}}
+ {\blxdw@error{%
+ Invalid option 'editorstring=#1'\MessageBreak
+ Valid values are 'normal', 'parens', 'brackets'}}}
+\newcommand{\bbx@editorstring}{}
+\def\bbx@opt@editorstring@normal{%
+ \global\boolfalse{bbx:editorstring}%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@editorstring}{}}
+\def\bbx@opt@editorstring@parens{%
+ \global\booltrue{bbx:editorstring}%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@editorstring}{\mkbibparens}}
+\def\bbx@opt@editorstring@brackets{%
+ \global\booltrue{bbx:editorstring}%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@editorstring}{\mkbibbrackets}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{editorstringfont}[normal]{%
+ \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@edstringfont@#1}
+ {\csuse{bbx@opt@edstringfont@#1}}
+ {\blxdw@error{%
+ Invalid option 'editorstringfont=#1'\MessageBreak
+ Valid values are 'normal' and 'namefont'}}}
+\newcommand{\bbx@edstringfont}{}
+\def\bbx@opt@edstringfont@normal{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@edstringfont}{}}
+\def\bbx@opt@edstringfont@namefont{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@edstringfont}{\bbx@namefont}}
+
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+ edbyidem=true,
+ editorstring=parens,
+ idembib=true,
+ idembibformat=idem,
+ nolocation=false,
+ nopublisher=true,
+ oldauthor=true,
+ origfields=true,
+ origfieldsformat=punct,
+ pseudoauthor=true
+}
+
+%% Autoren, Herausgeber und Übersetzter in der Bibliographie
+\DeclareNameAlias{author}{sortname}
+\DeclareNameAlias{editor}{sortname}
+\DeclareNameAlias{translator}{sortname}
+
+%% Komma statt Punkt nach einzelnen Elementen der Literaturangaben
+\renewcommand*{\newunitpunct}{\addcomma\space}
+
+%% Punkt zwischen Titel und Untertitel
+\renewcommand*{\subtitlepunct}{\addperiod\space}
+
+%% Punkt zwischen Untertitel und Titelzusatz ([book|main]titleaddon)
+\newcommand*{\titleaddonpunct}{\addperiod\space}
+
+%% Doppelpunkt nach Autoren/Editoren
+\renewcommand*{\labelnamepunct}{\addcolon\space}
+
+%% Zeichensetzung zwischen Ort und Jahr
+\newcommand*{\locationdatepunct}{\addspace}
+
+%% Zeichensetzung zwischen Ort und Verlag
+\newcommand*{\locationpublisherpunct}{\addcolon\space}
+
+%% Zeichensetzung zwischen Verlag und Jahr
+\newcommand*{\publisherdatepunct}{\addcomma\space}
+
+%% Zeichen vor 'Nachdruck' bei Benutzung von 'origfields'
+\newcommand*{\origfieldspunct}{\addcomma\space}
+
+%% Zeichen für pseudoauthor=true
+\newcommand*{\bibleftpseudo}{}
+\newcommand*{\bibrightpseudo}{}
+
+%% Zeichen zw. Autoren/Editoren in der Bibliographie
+\newcommand*{\bibrevsdnamedelim}{\addspace}
+\newcommand*{\bibmultinamedelim}{\addcomma\space}
+\newcommand*{\bibfinalnamedelim}{%
+ \ifnum\value{liststop}>2 \finalandcomma\fi
+ \addspace\bibstring{and}\space}%
+
+\AtBeginBibliography{%
+ \let\revsdnamedelim\bibrevsdnamedelim%
+ \let\multinamedelim\bibmultinamedelim%
+ \let\finalnamedelim\bibfinalnamedelim%
+}
+
+%% Makros für Schriften der Felder 'annotation' und 'library'
+\newcommand{\annotationfont}{\small\itshape}
+\newcommand{\libraryfont}{\small\sffamily}
+
+%% Formate in der Bibliographie
+\DeclareFieldFormat{annotation}{%
+ \annotationfont #1}%\addperiod\par}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{edition}{%
+ \ifinteger{#1}
+ {\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{edition}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:editionstring}
+ {#1\addspace\bibstring{edition}\isdot}
+ {#1\isdot}}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{edition:super}{% für Option 'edsuper'
+ \ifinteger{#1}
+ {\textsuperscript{#1}}
+ {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+ The 'edition' field of entry\MessageBreak
+ '\abx@field@entrykey' is not an integer.\MessageBreak
+ The edition will not be printed as\MessageBreak
+ superscript. Instead, the 'edition'\MessageBreak
+ field is printed completely}}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{library}{%
+ \libraryfont #1}%\addperiod\par}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{review}{%
+ \bibstring{review}%
+ \enquote{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandwidth}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ bool {bbx:shorthandacro}
+ and
+ bool {bbx:acronym}
+ }
+ {\mkbibacro{#1}\isdot}
+ {#1\isdot}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{shortjournal}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ bool {bbx:shorthandacro}
+ and
+ bool {bbx:acronym}
+ }
+ {\mkbibacro{#1}\isdot}
+ {#1\isdot}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat*{title}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[inreference]{title}{%
+ \bibstring{inrefstring}%
+ \enquote{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[review]{title}{%
+ \bibstring{review}%
+ \enquote{#1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[inreference]{volume}{#1}% volume of an inreference entry
+\DeclareFieldFormat[review]{volume}{#1}% volume of a review entry
+\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthand}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:shorthandacro}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:acronym}
+ {\mkbibacro{#1}\isdot}
+ {#1\isdot}}
+ {#1\isdot}}
+
+%% Umdefinierung von finentry für 'annotation' und 'library'
+\renewbibmacro*{finentry}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\iffieldundef{annotation}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldundef{library}}
+ }
+ {\finentry}
+ {\iffieldundef{annotation}
+ {\iffieldundef{library}
+ {\finentry}
+ {}}%
+ {\ifbool{bbx:annotation}
+ {\setunit{\addperiod\par}
+ \printfield{annotation}}
+ {}}%
+ \iffieldundef{library}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:library}
+ {\setunit{\addperiod\par}
+ \printfield{library}}
+ {}}%
+ \finentry}}
+
+% Ausschalten von annotation und library für die List of Shorthands
+\AtEveryLositem{%
+ \boolfalse{bbx:annotation}%
+ \boolfalse{bbx:library}%
+}
+
+%% Wichtig für die Herausgebernamen in der List of Shorthands
+\InitializeBibliographyStyle{%
+ \let\bbx@lasthash\undefined}
+
+% Nachnamen von Einträgen mit 'options = {oldauthor=true}'
+% oder 'options = {oldbookauthor=true}'
+% werden nicht in der Schrift von 'namefont' gesetzt
+% Formatierung der Nachnamen entsprechend der Option 'namefont'
+\renewcommand*{\mkbibnamefamily}[1]{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ ( bool {bbx:oldauthor}
+ and
+ ( ( bool {oldauthor}
+ and
+ ( test {\ifcurrentname{author}}
+ or
+ ( test {\ifcurrentname{labelname}}
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{author}} ) ) )
+ or
+ ( bool {oldbookauthor}
+ and
+ test {\ifcurrentname{bookauthor}} ) ) )
+ or
+ ( bool{cbx:citeauthor}
+ and
+ ( bool{cbx:citeauthornormalfont}
+ or
+ ( bool{cbx:citeauthorfoot}
+ and
+ not test {\iffootnote} ) ) )
+ }
+ {#1}
+ {\bbx@namefont{#1}}}
+
+% Formatierung der Vornamen entsprechend der Option 'firstnamefont'
+\renewcommand*{\mkbibnamegiven}[1]{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ ( bool {bbx:oldauthor}
+ and
+ ( ( bool {oldauthor}
+ and
+ ( test {\ifcurrentname{author}}
+ or
+ ( test {\ifcurrentname{labelname}}
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{author}} ) ) )
+ or
+ ( bool {oldbookauthor}
+ and
+ test {\ifcurrentname{bookauthor}} ) ) )
+ or
+ ( bool{cbx:citeauthor}
+ and
+ ( bool{cbx:citeauthornormalfont}
+ or
+ ( bool{cbx:citeauthorfoot}
+ and
+ not test {\iffootnote} ) ) )
+ }
+ {#1}
+ {\bbx@firstnamefont{#1}}}
+
+% prefix richtet sich nach 'namefont' (useprefix=true)
+% oder 'firstnamefont' (useprefix=false)
+\renewcommand*{\mkbibnameprefix}[1]{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ ( bool {bbx:oldauthor}
+ and
+ ( ( bool {oldauthor}
+ and
+ ( test {\ifcurrentname{author}}
+ or
+ ( test {\ifcurrentname{labelname}}
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{author}} ) ) )
+ or
+ ( bool {oldbookauthor}
+ and
+ test {\ifcurrentname{bookauthor}} ) ) )
+ or
+ ( bool{cbx:citeauthor}
+ and
+ ( bool{cbx:citeauthornormalfont}
+ or
+ ( bool{cbx:citeauthorfoot}
+ and
+ not test {\iffootnote} ) ) )
+ }
+ {#1}
+ {\ifuseprefix
+ {\bbx@namefont{#1}}
+ {\bbx@firstnamefont{#1}}}}
+
+% suffix richtet sich nach 'firstnamefont'
+\renewcommand*{\mkbibnamesuffix}[1]{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ ( bool {bbx:oldauthor}
+ and
+ ( ( bool {oldauthor}
+ and
+ ( test {\ifcurrentname{author}}
+ or
+ ( test {\ifcurrentname{labelname}}
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{author}} ) ) )
+ or
+ ( bool {oldbookauthor}
+ and
+ test {\ifcurrentname{bookauthor}} ) ) )
+ or
+ ( bool{cbx:citeauthor}
+ and
+ ( bool{cbx:citeauthornormalfont}
+ or
+ ( bool{cbx:citeauthorfoot}
+ and
+ not test {\iffootnote} ) ) )
+ }
+ {#1}
+ {\bbx@firstnamefont{#1}}}
+
+%% \mkidem:
+% wenn im Feld 'options' 'oldauthor=true' oder 'oldauthor' steht,
+% werden keine Kapitälchen o.ä. bei Wiederholungszitaten ('Ders.') gesetzt
+% ansonsten Formatierung entsprechend der Option 'idemfont',
+% falls diese nicht vorhanden ist, wird der Wert von 'namefont' übernommen
+\newcommand*{\mkidem}[1]{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ bool {bbx:oldauthor}
+ and
+ bool {oldauthor}
+ }
+ {#1}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:idemfont}
+ {\bbx@idemfont{#1}}
+ {\bbx@namefont{#1}}}}
+
+%% Punkt zwischen Untertitel und Titelzusatz ([book|main]titleaddon)
+\renewbibmacro*{title}{%
+ \iffieldundef{title}
+ {}
+ {\printtext[title]{%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
+ \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
+ \setunit{\titleaddonpunct}%
+ \printfield{titleaddon}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{booktitle}{%
+ \iffieldundef{booktitle}
+ {}
+ {\printtext[booktitle]{%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{booktitle}%
+ \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{booksubtitle}}%
+ \setunit{\titleaddonpunct}%
+ \printfield{booktitleaddon}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{maintitle}{%
+ \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+ {}
+ {\printtext[maintitle]{%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{maintitle}%
+ \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{mainsubtitle}}%
+ \setunit{\titleaddonpunct}%
+ \printfield{maintitleaddon}}}
+
+%% Ort, Verlag, Jahr:
+%% - mit 'origfields=true' werden origlocation, origpublisher
+%% und origyear gesetzt, der Rest als 'reprint' angehängt
+%% - der Verlag ist optional (nopublisher=true|false)
+%% - die Edition kann hochgestellt werden (edsuper=true|false)
+\newbibmacro*{origdate}{\printorigdate}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:origfields}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:nolocation}
+ {\iffieldundef{origyear}
+ {\usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}}
+ {\usebibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}}}
+ {\iflistundef{origlocation}
+ {\iffieldundef{origyear}
+ {\usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}}
+ {\usebibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}}}
+ {\iffieldundef{origyear}
+ {\blxdw@warning{%
+ Field 'origlocation' is set, but 'origdate' is
+ \MessageBreak%
+ empty at entry '\abx@field@entrykey'.
+ The 'orig' fields \MessageBreak are omitted
+ for this entry}%
+ \usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}}
+ {\usebibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}}}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{loc+pub+year}}}
+
+\newbibmacro{loc+pub+year}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:nolocation}
+ {}
+ {\printlist{location}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:nopublisher}
+ {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}%
+ {\iflistundef{publisher}
+ {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}
+ {\setunit*{\locationpublisherpunct}%
+ \printlist{publisher}%
+ \setunit*{\publisherdatepunct}}}}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:edsuper}
+ {\printfield[edition:super]{edition}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{date}%
+ \newunit}
+
+\newbibmacro{origloc+origpub+origyear}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:nolocation}
+ {}
+ {\printlist{origlocation}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:nopublisher}
+ {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}%
+ {\iflistundef{origpublisher}
+ {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}
+ {\setunit*{\locationpublisherpunct}%
+ \printlist{origpublisher}%
+ \setunit*{\publisherdatepunct}}}}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:edsuper}
+ {\printfield[edition:super]{edition}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{origdate}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{punct}
+ {\setunit*{\origfieldspunct}%
+ \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{parens}
+ {\setunit*{\addspace}%
+ \printtext[parens]{%
+ \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{brackets}
+ {\setunit*{\addspace}%
+ \printtext[brackets]{%
+ \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}}
+ {\setunit*{\origfieldspunct}%
+ \usebibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}}}}
+ \newunit}
+
+\newbibmacro{origfields:loc+pub+year}{%
+ \bibstring{reprint}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:nolocation}
+ {}
+ {\printlist{location}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:nopublisher}
+ {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}%
+ {\iflistundef{publisher}
+ {\setunit*{\locationdatepunct}}
+ {\setunit*{\locationpublisherpunct}%
+ \printlist{publisher}%
+ \setunit*{\publisherdatepunct}}}}%
+ \usebibmacro{date}}
+
+%% Test, ob ein Feld nur eine Zahl beinhaltet
+\newcommand{\bbx@iffieldinteger}[1]{%
+ \iffieldundef{#1}
+ {\@secondoftwo}
+ {\edef\@tempa{\strfield{#1}}%
+ \expandafter\ifinteger\expandafter{\@tempa}}}
+
+%% Edition nur ausgeben, wenn Option 'edsuper=false'
+\newbibmacro*{edition}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:edsuper}
+ {\bbx@iffieldinteger{edition}
+ {}% falls 'edition' eine Zahl ist, wird hochgestellt
+ {\printfield{edition}%
+ \newunit}}% ansonsten wird komplett ausgegeben
+ {\printfield{edition}%
+ \newunit}}
+
+%% Hilfsmakro für Option editorstring
+\newbibmacro*{editorstringpunct}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:editorstring}
+ {\addspace}
+ {\addcomma\space}}
+
+%% Herausgeber ('Hrsg.') je nach Option editorstring
+\renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%
+ \iffieldundef{editortype}
+ {\ifthenelse{\value{editor}>1\OR\ifandothers{editor}}
+ {\bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{editors}}}}
+ {\bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{editor}}}}}
+ {\ifthenelse{\value{editor}>1\OR\ifandothers{editor}}
+ {\bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}}}
+ {\bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}}}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{editor+othersstrg}{%
+ \iffieldundef{editortype}
+ {\ifthenelse{\value{editor}>1\OR\ifandothers{editor}}
+ {\def\abx@tempa{editors}}
+ {\def\abx@tempa{editor}}}
+ {\ifthenelse{\value{editor}>1\OR\ifandothers{editor}}
+ {\edef\abx@tempa{\thefield{editortype}s}}
+ {\edef\abx@tempa{\thefield{editortype}}}}%
+ \let\abx@tempb=\empty
+ \ifnamesequal{editor}{translator}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{tr}%
+ \appto\abx@tempb{\clearname{translator}}}
+ {}%
+ \ifnamesequal{editor}{commentator}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{co}%
+ \appto\abx@tempb{\clearname{commentator}}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{editor}{annotator}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{an}%
+ \appto\abx@tempb{\clearname{annotator}}}
+ {}}%
+ \ifnamesequal{editor}{introduction}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{in}%
+ \appto\abx@tempb{\clearname{introduction}}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{editor}{foreword}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{fo}%
+ \appto\abx@tempb{\clearname{foreword}}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{editor}{afterword}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{af}%
+ \appto\abx@tempb{\clearname{afterword}}}
+ {}}}%
+ \ifbibxstring{\abx@tempa}
+ {\bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{\abx@tempa}}}%
+ \abx@tempb}
+ {\usebibmacro{editorstrg}}}
+
+%% Übersetzer ('Übers.') je nach Option editorstring
+\renewbibmacro*{translatorstrg}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\value{translator}>1\OR\ifandothers{translator}}
+ {\bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{translators}}}}
+ {\bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{translator}}}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{translator+othersstrg}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\value{translator}>1\OR\ifandothers{translator}}
+ {\def\abx@tempa{translators}}
+ {\def\abx@tempa{translator}}%
+ \ifnamesequal{translator}{commentator}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{co}%
+ \clearname{commentator}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{translator}{annotator}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{an}%
+ \clearname{annotator}}
+ {}}%
+ \ifnamesequal{translator}{introduction}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{in}%
+ \clearname{introduction}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{translator}{foreword}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{fo}%
+ \clearname{foreword}}
+ {\ifnamesequal{translator}{afterword}
+ {\appto\abx@tempa{af}%
+ \clearname{afterword}}
+ {}}}%
+ \bbx@edstringfont{\bbx@editorstring{\bibstring{\abx@tempa}}}}
+
+%% Option 'editorstring=brackets|parens|normal'
+%% Option 'idembib=true|false'
+\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifuseeditor\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{editor}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+ \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\bibnamedash}
+ {\printnames{editor}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+ {\printnames{editor}%
+ \global\undef\bbx@lasthash}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {}
+ {\labelnamepunct}%
+ \clearname{editor}}
+ {}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{editor+others}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifuseeditor\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{editor}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+ \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\bibnamedash}
+ {\printnames{editor}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+ {\printnames{editor}}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}%
+ \usebibmacro{editor+othersstrg}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {}
+ {\labelnamepunct}%
+ \clearname{editor}}
+ {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{translator}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifusetranslator\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{translator}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+ \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\bibnamedash}
+ {\printnames{translator}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+ {\printnames{translator}}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}%
+ \usebibmacro{translatorstrg}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {}
+ {\labelnamepunct}%
+ \clearname{translator}}
+ {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{translator+others}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifusetranslator\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{translator}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+ \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\bibnamedash}
+ {\printnames{translator}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+ {\printnames{translator}}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}%
+ \usebibmacro{translator+othersstrg}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {}
+ {\labelnamepunct}%
+ \clearname{translator}}
+ {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{editor+others/translator+others}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifuseeditor
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}
+ }
+ {\usebibmacro{editor+others}}
+ {\usebibmacro{translator+others}}}
+
+%% Option 'idembib=true|false'
+\renewbibmacro*{author}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:pseudoauthor}
+ {\usebibmacro{author:pseudotrue}}
+ {\usebibmacro{author:pseudofalse}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{author:pseudotrue}{%
+ \ifbool{pseudoauthor}
+ {\printtext{\bibleftpseudo}%
+ \usebibmacro{author:output}%
+ \printtext{\bibrightpseudo}}
+ {\usebibmacro{author:output}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{author:pseudofalse}{%
+ \ifbool{pseudoauthor}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author:output}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{author:output}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifuseauthor\AND\NOT\ifnameundef{author}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:idembib}
+ {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+ \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\bibnamedash}
+ {\printnames{author}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}
+ {\printnames{author}%
+ \global\undef\bbx@lasthash}%
+ \iffieldundef{authortype}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \usebibmacro{authorstrg}}}
+ {}}
+
+%% 'Ders.' bei inbook, wenn gleicher Autor
+\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{%
+ \ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\midsentence*\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}\addcolon}
+ {\printnames[byauthor]{bookauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock}}
+ {\printnames[byauthor]{bookauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock}}
+
+%% Wenn Autor und Hrsg. gleich --> hg. v. dems./ders./dens.:
+\renewbibmacro*{byeditor+others}{%
+ \ifnameundef{editor}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{byeditor+othersstrg}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ ( ( ( not test {\ifentrytype{inbook}}% alle außer inbook: author und editor gleich?
+ and
+ test {\ifnamesequal{editor}{author}} )
+ or
+ ( test {\ifentrytype{inbook}}
+ and
+ ( test {\ifnameundef{bookauthor}}% inbook ohne bookauthor: author und editor gleich?
+ and
+ test {\ifnamesequal{editor}{author}} )
+ or
+ ( not test {\ifnameundef{bookauthor}}% inbook mit bookauthor: author und bookauthor gleich?
+ and
+ test {\ifnamesequal{editor}{bookauthor}} ) ) )
+ or
+ ( bool {xrefidem}
+ and not
+ bool {cbx:authauthxref} ) )
+ and
+ bool {bbx:edbyidem}
+ }
+ {\bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+ {\printnames[byeditor]{editor}}%
+ \clearname{editor}%
+ \newunit}%
+ \usebibmacro{byeditorx}%
+ \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+others}{%
+ \ifnameundef{translator}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ ( test {\ifnamesequal{translator}{author}}
+ or
+ bool {xrefidem} )
+ and
+ bool {bbx:edbyidem}
+ }
+ {\bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+ {\printnames[bytranslator]{translator}}%
+ \clearname{translator}%
+ \newunit}%
+ \usebibmacro{withothers}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{ifuse:byeditor+others}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ ( test \ifuseeditor
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{editor}} )
+ or
+ ( test \ifusetranslator
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{translator}} )
+ or
+ bool {xref:inbook}
+ }
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{ifuse:xrefidem}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifuseeditor
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}
+ }
+ {\printtext{\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}%
+ \addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{editor+othersstrg}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifusetranslator
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{translator}}
+ and
+ ( ( not test \ifuseeditor )
+ or
+ ( test \ifuseeditor
+ and
+ test {\ifnameundef{editor}} ) )
+ }
+ {\printtext{\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}%
+ \addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{editor+othersstrg}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+ {}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Makros aus authortitle.bbx (unverändert) %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+
+\setlength{\bibitemsep}{0pt}
+
+\defbibenvironment{bibliography}
+ {\list
+ {}
+ {\setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}%
+ \setlength{\itemindent}{-\leftmargin}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}}
+ {\endlist}
+ {\item}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/footnote-dw.bbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/footnote-dw.bbx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a0ebd77967
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/footnote-dw.bbx
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+% footnote-dw.bbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016
+
+\ProvidesFile{footnote-dw.bbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex bibliography style]
+
+\RequireBibliographyStyle{authortitle-dw}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/standard-dw.bbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/standard-dw.bbx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..66d7740802
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/bbx/standard-dw.bbx
@@ -0,0 +1,1884 @@
+% standard-dw.bbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016
+
+\ProvidesFile{standard-dw.bbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex bibliography style]
+
+\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/11}
+ {}
+ {\PackageError{biblatex-dw}
+ {Outdated 'biblatex' package\MessageBreak
+ Upgrade to biblatex v3.3 (2016/03/11) or later.\MessageBreak
+ I found: '\csuse{ver@biblatex.sty}'.\MessageBreak
+ This is a fatal error. I'm aborting now}%
+ \endinput}
+
+\RequireBibliographyStyle{standard}
+
+\DeclareLanguageMapping{english}{english-dw}
+\DeclareLanguageMapping{german}{german-dw}
+
+\newbool{bbx:acronym}
+\newbool{bbx:journumafteryear}
+\newbool{bbx:journumdate}
+\newbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+\newbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+\newbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}
+\newbool{bbx:seriesinparens}
+\newbool{bbx:shorthandacro}
+\newbool{bbx:shorthandinbib}
+\newbool{bbx:shorthandinbibpunct}% Kontrolle, ob shorthandinbib ausgegeben wurde
+\newbool{bbx:shorthandwidthbool}
+\newbool{bbx:shortjournal}
+\newbool{bbx:terselos}
+\newbool{bbx:xref}% soll xref überhaupt verwendet werden?
+\newbool{xrefidem}
+
+\newtoggle{listofshorthands}% sind wir in der List of Shorthands?
+
+% Schalter zum ein-/ausblenden bestimmter Felder
+\newbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+
+% Längen für Shorthand
+\newlength{\bbx@shorthandwidth}
+\newlength{\shorthandsep}
+
+% Hilfsbefehl für @review
+\newcommand*{\bbx@reviewparent}
+
+\DeclareEntryOption{acronym}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:acronym}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{acronyms}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:shorthandacro}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{shorthandinbib}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:shorthandinbib}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{shorthandwidth}{%
+ \setlength{\bbx@shorthandwidth}{#1}
+ \setlength{\shorthandsep}{3pt plus 0.5pt minus 0.5pt}
+ \renewcommand{\shorthandpunct}{\addcolon}
+ \csuse{booltrue}{bbx:shorthandwidthbool}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{shortjournal}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:shortjournal}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{terselos}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:terselos}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{xref}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:xref}}
+
+% Optionen zum ein-/ausblenden bestimmter Felder
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{pagetotal}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:pagetotal}}
+
+% journalnumber=standard|afteryear|date
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{journalnumber}{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{#1}}
+% zu Ehren von Bernhard Tempel
+\newbool{bbx:bernhard}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{bernhard}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{bbx:bernhard}}
+
+% Option series=standard|afteryear|beforeedition
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{series}[standard]{%
+ \ifcsdef{bbx@opt@series@#1}
+ {\csuse{bbx@opt@series@#1}}
+ {\blxdw@error{%
+ Invalid option 'series=#1'\MessageBreak
+ Valid values are 'standard', 'afteryear', 'beforeedition'}}}
+\def\bbx@opt@series@standard{%
+ \global\booltrue{bbx:seriesstandard}%
+ \global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesafteryear}%
+ \global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}}
+\def\bbx@opt@series@afteryear{%
+ \global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesstandard}%
+ \global\booltrue{bbx:seriesafteryear}%
+ \global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}}
+\def\bbx@opt@series@beforeedition{%
+ \global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesstandard}%
+ \global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesafteryear}%
+ \global\booltrue{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}}
+
+% Option seriesformat=standard|parens
+\newcommand{\bbx@option@seriesformat}{}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{seriesformat}{%
+ \renewcommand{\bbx@option@seriesformat}{#1}}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@seriesformat}{parens}
+ {\global\booltrue{bbx:seriesinparens}}
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:seriesinparens}}}
+
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+ doi=false,
+ eprint=false,
+ isbn=false,
+ journalnumber=standard,
+ pagetotal=false,
+ series=standard,
+ seriesformat=parens,
+ shorthandinbib=false,
+ terselos=true,
+ xref=false
+}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+ {\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{mincrossrefs=1}}
+ {}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{idemreference}{idemcollection}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{xrefreference}{xrefcollection}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{xrefidemreference}{xrefidemcollection}
+
+%% Zeichen bei Zeitschriften:
+%% -> vor 'volume' (z.B. 'Jg. ')
+\newcommand*{\jourvolstring}{\addspace}
+%% -> zwischen 'volume' und 'number'
+%% (nur mit journumafteryear=true)
+\newcommand*{\jourvolnumsep}{\adddot}
+%% -> vor 'number' (z.B. ', Nr. ')
+\newcommand*{\journumstring}{%
+ \addcomma\space%
+ \bibstring{number}%
+ \addnbspace}
+
+%% Zeichen bei Reihen:
+%% -> vor 'series' (z.B. '= ')
+\newcommand*{\seriespunct}{}
+%% -> vor 'number' (z.B. ', Bd. ')
+\newcommand*{\sernumstring}{\addspace}
+
+%% Reihe in Klammern (Option seriesformat)
+\renewbibmacro*{series+number}{%
+ \iffieldundef{series}%
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:seriesinparens}
+ {\printtext[parens]{%
+ \seriespunct%
+ \printfield{series}%
+ \setunit*{\sernumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}}%
+ \newunit}
+ {\setunit{\newunitpunct\seriespunct}%
+ \printfield{series}%
+ \setunit*{\sernumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \newunit}}}
+
+%% Kürzere Ausgabe der List of Shorthands
+\newbibmacro*{terselos}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:terselos}
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\ifnameundef{author}
+ {\printnames{editor}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstrg}}
+ {\printnames{author}}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}}%
+ \iffieldundef{booktitle}
+ {\usebibmacro{maintitle+title-terselos}}
+ {\printfield{title}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle-terselos}}%
+ \finentry}
+ {\usedriver
+ {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}%
+ \finentry}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{maintitle+title-terselos}{%
+ \iffieldsequal{maintitle}{title}
+ {\clearfield{maintitle}%
+ \clearfield{mainsubtitle}%
+ \clearfield{maintitleaddon}}
+ {\iffieldundef{maintitle}
+ {}
+ {\printfield{maintitle}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {}
+ {\iffieldundef{volumes}
+ {}
+ {\printfield{volumes}%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
+ \printfield{volume}%
+ \printfield{part}%
+ \setunit{\addcolon\space}}}}%
+ \printfield{title}%
+ \newunit}
+
+\newbibmacro*{maintitle+booktitle-terselos}{%
+ \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+ {}
+ {\printfield{maintitle}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {}
+ {\printfield{volume}%
+ \printfield{part}%
+ \setunit{\addcolon\space}}}%
+ \printfield{booktitle}%
+ \newunit}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{shorthand}{%
+ \toggletrue{listofshorthands}%
+ \usebibmacro{terselos}}
+
+%% Zeichensetzung nach dem Shorthand-Label
+\newcommand{\shorthandpunct}{}
+
+%% List of Shorthands: Länge der Labels einstellbar
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\ifbool{bbx:shorthandwidthbool}
+ {\defbibenvironment{shorthand}
+ {\list
+ {\printfield[shorthandwidth]{shorthand}%
+ \printtext{\shorthandpunct}}
+ {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\bbx@shorthandwidth}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{\shorthandsep}%
+ \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}%
+ \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{##1\hss}}}
+ {\endlist}
+ {\item}}
+ {\defbibenvironment{shorthand}
+ {\list
+ {\printfield[shorthandwidth]{shorthand}}
+ {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\shorthandwidth}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+ \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}%
+ \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}%
+ \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{##1\hss}}}
+ {\endlist}
+ {\item}}}
+
+%% Option »shorthandinbib«:
+%% Shorthands in der Bibliographie ausgeben
+%% außerdem für Option »xref«:
+%% Autoren in Liste schreiben für späteren Test xrefnamecheck
+% \newcommand*{\@xrefauthornames}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandinbib}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\shorthandinbibpunct}{\addspace}
+\renewbibmacro*{begentry}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ bool {bbx:shorthandinbib}
+ and not
+ ( test {\ifcitation}
+ or
+ togl {listofshorthands} )
+ }
+ {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {}
+ {\printfield[shorthandinbib]{shorthand}%
+ \nopunct\shorthandinbibpunct}}
+ {}}
+
+%% bei useeditor=true oder usetranslator=true
+\newbibmacro*{useeditor+others}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifuseeditor
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}
+ }
+ {\usebibmacro{useeditor}}
+ {\ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifusetranslator
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{translator}}
+ }
+ {\usebibmacro{usetranslator}}
+ {}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{useeditor}{%
+ \ifnamesequal{author}{editor}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\midsentence*\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}%
+ \addspace}%
+ {\printnames[byeditor]{editor}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+ {\printnames[byeditor]{editor}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+ \clearname{editor}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+
+\newbibmacro*{usetranslator}{%
+ \ifnamesequal{author}{translator}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\midsentence*\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}%
+ \addspace}%
+ {\printnames[byeditor]{translator}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}}%
+ {\printnames[byeditor]{translator}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}}%
+ \usebibmacro{translatorstrg}%
+ \clearname{translator}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+
+%% Wenn 'volumes' und 'volume' angegeben sind,
+%% 'volumes' immer vor 'volume' ausgeben
+\newbibmacro*{volumes+volume+part}{%
+ \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+ {\iffieldundef{volumes}
+ {}
+ {\printfield{volumes}%
+ \newunit}%
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {}
+ {\printfield{volume}%
+ \printfield{part}%
+ \setunit{\addcolon\space}}}
+ {\iffieldundef{volume}% Wenn es einen maintitle gibt,
+ % aber kein 'volume'-Feld, wurde
+ % 'volumes' noch nicht ausgegeben!
+ {\printfield{volumes}}
+ {}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{maintitle+title}{%
+ \iffieldsequal{maintitle}{title}
+ {\clearfield{maintitle}%
+ \clearfield{mainsubtitle}%
+ \clearfield{maintitleaddon}}
+ {\iffieldundef{maintitle}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{maintitle}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {}
+ {\iffieldundef{volumes}
+ {}
+ {\printfield{volumes}%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
+ \printfield{volume}%
+ \printfield{part}%
+ \setunit{\addcolon\space}}}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit}
+
+%% Test, ob 'volume' vorhanden ist (bei xref parent)
+\newbibmacro*{xrefvolumecheck}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+ {\iffieldundef{volume}
+ {\xifinlistcs{\strfield{entrykey}}{novolume@xrefparent}
+ {}% schon in Liste vorhanden, dann passiert nichts
+ {\listcsxadd{novolume@xrefparent}{\thefield{entrykey}}}}%
+ {}}
+ {}}
+
+%% Test, ob 'citedas=true' gesetzt ist (bei xref parent)
+\newbibmacro*{xrefcitedascheck}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {\xifinlistcs{\strfield{entrykey}}{citedas@xrefparent}
+ {}% schon in Liste vorhanden, dann passiert nichts
+ {\listcsxadd{citedas@xrefparent}{\thefield{entrykey}}}}%
+ {}}
+ {}}
+
+%% Tests werden bei 'xref=true' in @book, @collection,
+%% @proceedings und @reference ausgeführt
+\AtDataInput[book]{%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}}
+\AtDataInput[collection]{%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}}
+\AtDataInput[proceedings]{%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}}
+\AtDataInput[reference]{%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolumecheck}%
+ \usebibmacro{xrefcitedascheck}}
+
+%% 'volume' bei xref-child ausgeben, falls
+%% in xref-parent nicht definiert
+\newbibmacro*{xrefvolume}{%
+ \xifinlistcs{\strfield{xref}}{novolume@xrefparent}
+ {\newunit
+ \printfield{volume}%
+ \iffieldxref{year}% wenn 'year' bei child und parent gleich
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \iflistxref{location}% wenn 'location' bei child und parent gleich
+ {}
+ {\printlist{location}%
+ \setunit*{\addspace}}%
+ \usebibmacro{date}}}
+ {}}%
+
+% bei @inreference: booktitle, vol. (year)
+\newbibmacro*{xrefvolume:inreference}{%
+ \xifinlistcs{\strfield{xref}}{novolume@xrefparent}
+ {\iffieldundef{volume}
+ {}
+ {\ifbibliography
+ {\setunit{\addspace}}
+ {\xifinlistcs{\strfield{xref}}{citedas@xrefparent}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite}
+ {\newunit
+ \printtext{\bibstring{volume}\addspace}}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}}}
+ {\newunit
+ \printtext{\bibstring{volume}\addspace}}}%
+ \printfield{volume}%
+ \iffieldxref{year}% wenn 'year' bei child und parent gleich
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield[parens]{year}}}}
+ {}}
+
+%% 'volume' und 'year' ausgeben bei @inreference
+\newbibmacro*{volumes+volume+part+year}{%
+ \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+ {\iffieldundef{volumes}
+ {}
+ {\printfield{volumes}%
+ \newunit}%
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{volume}%
+ \printfield{part}}%
+ \iffieldundef{year}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield[parens]{year}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}}}
+ {\iffieldundef{volume}% Wenn es einen maintitle gibt,
+ % aber kein 'volume'-Feld, wurde
+ % 'volumes' noch nicht ausgegeben!
+ {\printfield{volumes}}
+ {}}}
+
+%% Option 'shortjournal=true|false'
+\renewbibmacro*{journal}{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:shortjournal}
+ {\iffieldundef{shortjournal}
+ {\usebibmacro{journal:normal}}
+ {\printfield{shortjournal}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{journal:normal}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{journal:normal}{% vollständige, 'normale' Ausgabe eines Zeitschriftentitels
+ \iffieldundef{journaltitle}
+ {}
+ {\printtext[journaltitle]{%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{journaltitle}%
+ \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+ \printfield[titlecase]{journalsubtitle}}}}
+
+%% Option 'journalnumber=standard|afteryear|date'
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifbool{bbx:bernhard}% Bernhard geht vor (c;
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:journumafteryear}%
+ \global\booltrue{bbx:journumdate}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{afteryear}
+ {\global\booltrue{bbx:journumafteryear}%
+ \global\boolfalse{bbx:journumdate}}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{date}
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:journumafteryear}%
+ \global\booltrue{bbx:journumdate}}
+ {\global\boolfalse{bbx:journumafteryear}
+ \global\boolfalse{bbx:journumdate}}}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{%
+ \usebibmacro{useeditor+others}%
+ \usebibmacro{journal}%
+ \setunit*{\addspace}%
+ \iffieldundef{series}
+ {}
+ {\newunit
+ \printfield{series}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}}%
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\jourvolstring}%
+ \printfield{volume}}%
+ % ab hier Unterscheidung nach standard|afteryear|date
+ \ifbool{bbx:journumdate}
+ {\usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle+date}}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:journumafteryear}
+ {\usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle+afteryear}}
+ {\usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle+standard}}}}
+
+% journalnumber=standard
+\newbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle+standard}{%
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {\iffieldundef{number}
+ {}
+ {\blxdw@warning{%
+ Field 'number' set, but 'volume' is empty
+ \MessageBreak at entry '\abx@field@entrykey'.
+ The output might not \MessageBreak be correct}}}
+ {\setunit{\jourvolnumsep}%
+ \printfield{number}}%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printfield{eid}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {\iffieldundef{month}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
+ \usebibmacro{issue+date}}
+ {\printtext[parens]{\usebibmacro{issue+date}}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{issue}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit}
+
+% journalnumber=afteryear
+\newbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle+afteryear}{%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printfield{eid}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \iffieldundef{volume}
+ {\iffieldundef{month}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
+ \usebibmacro{issue+date}%
+ \iffieldundef{number}
+ {}
+ {\setunit*{\addcomma\space\journumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}}}%
+ {\printtext[parens]{\usebibmacro{issue+date}}%
+ \iffieldundef{number}
+ {}
+ {\setunit*{\journumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{issue}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit}
+
+% journalnumber=date
+\newbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle+date}{%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printfield{eid}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{issue+date+number}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{issue}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{% Klammern entfernt
+ \iffieldundef{issue}
+ {\printdate}
+ {\printfield{issue}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{year}}%
+ \newunit}
+
+\newbibmacro*{issue+date+number}{%
+ \iffieldundef{number}
+ {\iffieldundef{issue}%
+ {\iffieldundef{month}
+ {\printtext[parens]{\printdate}}
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printdate}}%
+ {\iffieldundef{month}% mit definiertem Feld issue
+ {\printtext[parens]{\printdate}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{issue}}%
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printdate}}}%
+ {\iffieldundef{issue}% mit definiertem Feld number
+ {\iffieldundef{month}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printtext[parens]{\printdate}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{number}}
+ {\iffieldundef{day}
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space\journumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printdate}%
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space\journumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printdate}}}%
+ {\iffieldundef{month}% mit definiertem Feld issue
+ {\printtext[parens]{\printdate}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printtext[parens]{\printfield{issue}}}%
+ {\iffieldundef{day}%
+ {\setunit{\addspace\journumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printdate
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printfield{issue}}%
+ {\setunit{\addcomma\space\journumstring}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printdate%
+ \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+ \printfield{issue}}}}}%
+ \newunit}
+
+%% pageref: space statt \newunit, da sonst Komma vor Klammer steht
+\renewbibmacro*{pageref}{%
+ \iflistundef{pageref}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printtext[parens]{%
+ \ifnumgreater{\value{pageref}}{1}
+ {\bibstring{backrefpages}\ppspace}
+ {\bibstring{backrefpage}\ppspace}%
+ \printlist[pageref][-\value{listtotal}]{pageref}}}}
+
+\renewbibmacro*{note+pages}{%
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:rpcited}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
+ \printfield{pages}}%
+ \newunit}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Bibmacros für Code, der im Bibliography %%%%%
+%%%%% Driver aufgerufen wird, wenn KEIN xref %%%%%
+%%%%% vorhanden ist. %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+\newbibmacro{noxref:inbook}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}}%
+
+\newbibmacro{noxref:incollection}{%
+ \usebibmacro{useeditor+others}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}}
+
+\newbibmacro{noxref:inproceedings}{%
+ \usebibmacro{useeditor+others}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}}%
+
+\newbibmacro{noxref:inreference}{%
+ \usebibmacro{useeditor+others}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part+year}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Bibliography Driver %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{article}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{version}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{note+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{issn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{book}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{booklet}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{howpublished}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{location+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{collection}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \setunit*{\labelnamepunct}}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\newbool{xref:inbook}%
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inbook}{%
+ \booltrue{xref:inbook}% the child is an inbook
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \usebibmacro{authauthxrefcheck}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:authauthxref}
+ {\booltrue{xrefidem}}
+ {\boolfalse{xrefidem}}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+ {\iffieldundef{xref}%
+ {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden
+ \usebibmacro{noxref:inbook}}%
+ {\printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolume}%
+ \usebibmacro{pages}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{noxref:inbook}}% bei xref=false
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{incollection}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \usebibmacro{authedxrefcheck}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:authedxref}
+ {\booltrue{xrefidem}}
+ {\boolfalse{xrefidem}}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+ {\iffieldundef{xref}
+ {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden
+ \usebibmacro{noxref:incollection}}
+ {\printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolume}%
+ \usebibmacro{pages}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{noxref:incollection}}% bei xref=false
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inproceedings}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifuseeditor
+ or
+ test \ifusetranslator
+ }
+ {\ifnamexref{labelname}%
+ {\booltrue{xrefidem}}%
+ {\boolfalse{xrefidem}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{authedxrefcheck}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:authedxref}
+ {\booltrue{xrefidem}}
+ {\boolfalse{xrefidem}}}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+ {\iffieldundef{xref}%
+ {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden
+ \usebibmacro{noxref:inproceedings}}%
+ {\printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolume}%
+ \usebibmacro{pages}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{noxref:inproceedings}}% bei xref=false
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inreference}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifuseeditor
+ or
+ test \ifusetranslator
+ }
+ {\ifnamexref{labelname}%
+ {\booltrue{xrefidem}}%
+ {\boolfalse{xrefidem}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{authedxrefcheck}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:authedxref}
+ {\booltrue{xrefidem}}
+ {\boolfalse{xrefidem}}}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:xref}
+ {\iffieldundef{xref}%
+ {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden
+ \usebibmacro{noxref:inreference}}%
+ {\ifentryseen{\thefield{xref}}
+ {\boolfalse{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite}}% parent wurde schon zitiert
+ {\booltrue{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite}}% parent wurde noch nicht zitiert
+ \printtext{\bbx@xref{\thefield{xref}}}% xref
+ \usebibmacro{xrefvolume:inreference}%
+ \usebibmacro{pages}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{noxref:inreference}}% bei xref=false
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{version}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{misc}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{howpublished}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{version}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{location}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{online}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{version}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:eprint}
+ {\usebibmacro{eprint}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{url+urldate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \setunit*{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \iflistundef{location}
+ {}
+ {\setunit*{\addspace}%
+ \printtext[parens]{%
+ \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byholder}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:url}
+ {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{periodical}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title+issuetitle}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{issn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{proceedings}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{report}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \setunit*{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{number}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{version}%
+ \newunit
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isrn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{review}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \iffieldundef{xref}
+ {% Code, wenn kein xref vorhanden
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{version}}
+ {% Code, wenn xref vorhanden
+ \savefield{xref}{\bbx@reviewparent}%
+ \printtext[review]{\bbx@review{\thefield{xref}}}}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{in:}%
+ \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{note+pages}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{issn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{thesis}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{type}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{unpublished}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:idemfull}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}}%
+ \usebibmacro{title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{howpublished}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \iftoggle{bbx:url}
+ {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Die folgenden 'xref'-BibliographyDriver sind %%%%%
+%%%%% nötig, damit bei Erstzitaten mit xref die %%%%%
+%%%%% Option useeditor=true beachtet wird. %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefbook}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifuseauthor or test \ifuseeditor or test \ifusetranslator}
+ {\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \ifbool{xref:inbook}% child is an @inbook entry
+ {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}
+ {\usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefcollection}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifuseeditor or test \ifusetranslator}
+ {\usebibmacro{editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefproceedings}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifuseeditor or test \ifusetranslator}
+ {\usebibmacro{editor+others/translator+others}%
+ \setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Die folgenden 'xrefidem'-BibliographyDriver %%%%%
+%%%%% sind nötig damit bei Erstzitaten mit demselben %%%%%
+%%%%% Autor und xref ein Vollzitat erfolgen kann, %%%%%
+%%%%% ohne den Autor des referenzierten Werkes (der %%%%%
+%%%%% durch 'idem' ersetzt wird) auszugeben. %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefidembook}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \printtext{\bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}}%
+ \setunit{\nametitledelim}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \ifbool{xref:inbook}% child is an @inbook entry
+ {\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}
+ {\usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefidemcollection}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \usebibmacro{ifuse:xrefidem}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesbeforeedition}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{edition}%
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{xrefidemproceedings}{%
+ \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+ \usebibmacro{ifuse:xrefidem}%
+ \usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+ \newunit
+ \printlist{language}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{event+venue+date}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{ifuse:byeditor+others}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{volumes+volume+part}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesstandard}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printfield{note}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \printlist{organization}%
+ \newunit
+ \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+ \ifbool{bbx:seriesafteryear}
+ {\setunit{\addspace}%
+ \usebibmacro{series+number}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+ \newunit
+ \ifbool{bbx:pagetotal}
+ {\printfield{pagetotal}%
+ \newunit\newblock}
+ {}%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+ {\printfield{isbn}}
+ {}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+ \newunit\newblock
+ \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+ \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Warnungen und Fehlermeldungen %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+\protected\def\blxdw@error#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \blx@safe@actives
+ \PackageError{biblatex-dw}{#1}%
+ \endgroup}
+
+\protected\def\blxdw@warning#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \blx@safe@actives
+ \PackageWarning{biblatex-dw}{#1\blxdw@noline}%
+ \endgroup}
+\protected\def\blxdw@warning@noline#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \blx@safe@actives
+ \PackageWarning{biblatex-dw}{#1\@gobble}%
+ \endgroup}
+\protected\def\blxdw@warning@entry#1{%
+ \ifundef\abx@field@entrykey
+ {\blxdw@warning{#1}}
+ {\blxdw@warning{#1\MessageBreak at entry '\abx@field@entrykey'}}}
+\let\blxdw@noline\@gobble
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{punct}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{parens}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@origfieldsformat}{brackets}
+ {}
+ {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+ Unknown value for option 'origfieldsformat'.\MessageBreak
+ Option 'origfieldsformat=punct' used instead}}}}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{standard}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{afteryear}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@journalnumber}{date}
+ {}
+ {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+ Unknown value for option 'journalnumber'.\MessageBreak
+ Option 'journalnumber=standard' used instead}}}}%
+ \iftoggle{blx@useeditor}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+ {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+ Option 'omiteditor' cannot be used\MessageBreak
+ together with option 'useeditor=true'.\MessageBreak
+ Thus, 'omiteditor' is ignored}}
+ {}}%
+ {}%
+ \ifdefstring{\bbx@option@seriesformat}{standard}
+ {}
+ {\ifdefstring{\bbx@option@seriesformat}{parens}
+ {}
+ {\blxdw@warning@noline{%
+ Unknown value for option 'seriesformat'.\MessageBreak
+ Option 'seriesformat=standard' used instead}}}%
+}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/authortitle-dw.cbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/authortitle-dw.cbx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4362c0355c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/authortitle-dw.cbx
@@ -0,0 +1,403 @@
+% authortitle-dw.cbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016
+
+\ProvidesFile{authortitle-dw.cbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex citation style]
+
+\RequireCitationStyle{standard-dw}
+
+\newbool{cbx:addyear}
+\newbool{cbx:firstfull}
+\newbool{cbx:inref}% Option inreference (true: inreference=full; false: inreference=normal)
+\newbool{cbx:inreffull}% für fullcite bei inreference (nur bei Option inreference=full)
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{addyear}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:addyear}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{firstfull}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:firstfull}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{inreference}[normal]{%
+ \ifcsdef{cbx@opt@inreference@#1}
+ {\csuse{cbx@opt@inreference@#1}}
+ {\blxdw@error
+ {Invalid option 'inreference=#1'\MessageBreak
+ Valid values are 'normal' and 'full'}}}
+\def\cbx@opt@inreference@normal{%
+ \boolfalse{cbx:inref}}
+\def\cbx@opt@inreference@full{%
+ \booltrue{cbx:inref}%
+ \ExecuteBibliographyOptions[inreference]{skipbib=true,}}
+
+% Test, ob inreference genutzt wird
+\AtEveryCitekey{%
+ \ifentrytype{inreference}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:inref}
+ {\booltrue{cbx:inreffull}}
+ {\boolfalse{cbx:inreffull}}}
+ {}}
+
+%% Zeichen zwischen Titel und Jahr (bei addyear=true)
+\newcommand*{\titleyeardelim}{\addspace}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite}{%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:citepages}%
+ \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:inreffull}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:inreffull}}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:firstfull}
+ {\ifciteseen
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:normal}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:firstfull}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:normal}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:normal}{%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}%
+ \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:title}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}}
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:name}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:title}}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+ {}
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}
+ {}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}}}%
+ {\ifbool{cbx:shorthandibid}%
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:inreffull}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}%
+ \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}%
+ \booltrue{cbx:idemfull}}
+ {}%
+ \printtext[bibhyperref]{\usebibmacro{cite:full}}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:firstfull}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}%
+ \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}%
+ \booltrue{cbx:idemfull}}
+ {}%
+ \printtext[bibhyperref]{\usebibmacro{cite:full}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:full}{%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}%
+ \usedriver
+ {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+ {}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:shorthand}{%
+ \printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:noidem}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{textcite}{%
+ \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {\blxdw@warning@noline{No author or editor given for \textcite}%
+ \textbf{\thefield{entrykey}}}
+ {\ifboolexpr{
+ bool {cbx:citeauthornamefirstfull}
+ or
+ bool {cbx:citeauthornamefull}
+ }
+ {\printnames[citeauthor]{labelname}}
+ {\printnames{labelname}}%
+ \setunit{%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
+ \addspace\bibopenparen}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}}%
+ \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1}
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:firstfull}
+ {\ifciteseen
+ {\usebibmacro{textcite:normal}}
+ {\usebibmacro{textcite:firstfull}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{textcite:normal}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{textcite:firstfull}{%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\ifnamesequal{labelname}{author}
+ {\clearname{author}}
+ {}%
+ \ifnamesequal{labelname}{editor}
+ {\clearname{editor}}
+ {}%
+ \ifnamesequal{labelname}{translator}
+ {\clearname{translator}}
+ {}}%
+ \printtext[bibhyperref]{\usebibmacro{cite:full}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{textcite:normal}{%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}
+ {\ifsingletitle
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:title:force}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:title}}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
+
+%% xref
+\newbibmacro*{cite:xref}{%
+ \ifbool{cbx:firstfull}
+ {\ifciteseen
+ {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}%
+ {\ifbool{xrefidem}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:xref:idem}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}
+ \nametitledelim}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:title}%
+ \ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {\ifboolexpr{
+ bool {xrefidem}
+ and
+ bool {bbx:edbyidem}
+ }
+ {\newunit
+ \bibstring{byeditor}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}}
+ {}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}%
+ {\ifbool{xrefidem}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxrefidem}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxref}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxref}}}}%
+ {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifbool{xrefidem}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}}%
+ {\printnames{labelname}%
+ \nametitledelim}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}%
+ \nametitledelim}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:title}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+ {}
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}}
+
+\AtBeginBibliography{%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:xref}{%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifbool{xref:inbook}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:author}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorttitle}
+ {\printfield{title}}
+ {\printfield{shorttitle}}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+ {}
+ {\ifnameundef{editor}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{xrefidem}
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\newunit%
+ \bibstring{byeditor}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+ {\newunit%
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor}}}%
+ {\newunit%
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor}}}}}}
+ {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxref}{%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}%
+ \usedriver
+ {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {xref\thefield{entrytype}}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+ {}}}%
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxrefidem}{%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}%
+ \usedriver
+ {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {xrefidem\thefield{entrytype}}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+ {}}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\fullcite}
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}%
+ \booltrue{cbx:fullcite}}
+ {\usedriver
+ {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkbibfootnote]
+ {\bibsentence
+ \usebibmacro{prenote}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}%
+ \booltrue{cbx:fullcite}}
+ {\usedriver
+ {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{citetitle}{%
+ \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:title:force}}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:title}{%
+ \ifsingletitle
+ {\setunit{}}% Löschen des \nametitledelim, falls kein Titel ausgegeben wird
+ {\ifboolexpr{
+ test {\ifentrytype{review}}
+ and
+ not test {\iffieldundef{xref}}
+ }
+ {\printtext[review]{\bbx@review{\thefield{xref}}}}
+ {\printtext[bibhyperref]{%
+ \printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:addyear}
+ {\iffieldundef{year}
+ {}
+ {\titleyeardelim%
+ \parentext{\printfield{year}}}}
+ {}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:title:force}{%
+ \printtext[bibhyperref]{%
+ \printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:addyear}
+ {\iffieldundef{year}
+ {}
+ {\titleyeardelim%
+ \parentext{\printfield{year}}}}
+ {}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:labelyear+extrayear}{%
+ \iffieldundef{labelyear}
+ {}
+ {\printtext[bibhyperref]{%
+ \printfield{labelyear}%
+ \printfield{extrayear}}}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}[\mkbibparens]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\footcite}[\mkbibfootnote]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\footcitetext}[\mkbibfootnotetext]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\textcite}
+ {\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{textcite}}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:parens}
+ {\bibcloseparen\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}
+ {}%
+ \multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{textcite:postnote}}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Unverändert übernommen aus authortitle-ibid.cbx %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+
+\newbool{cbx:parens}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:ibid}{%
+ \printtext[bibhyperref]{\bibstring[\mkibid]{ibidem}}%
+ \ifloccit
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:loccit}}
+ {}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{textcite:postnote}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\iffieldundef{postnote}\OR\boolean{cbx:loccit}}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:parens}
+ {\bibcloseparen}
+ {}}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:parens}
+ {\postnotedelim}
+ {\addspace\bibopenparen}%
+ \printfield{postnote}\bibcloseparen}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand*{\cite}
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{citetitle}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand*{\parencite}[\mkbibparens]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{citetitle}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\smartcite}[\iffootnote\mkbibparens\mkbibfootnote]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/footnote-dw.cbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/footnote-dw.cbx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a45a55f260
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/footnote-dw.cbx
@@ -0,0 +1,324 @@
+% footnote-dw.cbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016
+
+\ProvidesFile{footnote-dw.cbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex citation style]
+
+\RequireCitationStyle{standard-dw}
+
+\newbool{cbx:pageref}
+\newbool{cbx:review}
+\newbool{cbx:textcitefull}
+
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+ uniquename=false, % damit bei idem=false Vor- und Nachname gesetzt werden!
+}
+
+% Befehle zum Verpacken der Zitate in Fußnoten
+\newrobustcmd{\mkfootnotecite}[1]{%
+ \iffootnote
+ {#1}
+ {\unspace\footnote{%
+ \toggletrue{blx@footnote}%
+ \bibsentence#1\addperiod}}}
+
+\newbool{cbx:parencitefoot}% wenn parencite innerhalb einer
+ % Fußnote aufgerufen wird
+ % (wichtig für seenote)
+\newrobustcmd{\mkparencite}[1]{%
+ \iffootnote
+ {\booltrue{cbx:parencitefoot}%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\mkbibparens\mkbibbrackets
+ \bibopenparen#1\bibcloseparen
+ \endgroup}
+ {\unspace\footnote{%
+ \toggletrue{blx@footnote}%
+ \bibsentence#1\addperiod}}}
+
+% Befehl zum Testen, ob in Fußnote (für \textcite)
+\newrobustcmd{\footnotecheck}{%
+ \iffootnote
+ {\booltrue{cbx:parencitefoot}}
+ {\boolfalse{cbx:parencitefoot}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite}{%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:citepages}%
+ \global\boolfalse{cbx:loccit}%
+ \bibhypertarget{cite\the\value{instcount}}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\ifciteseen}
+ and not
+ bool {cbx:textcitefull}
+ }
+ {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:reset}}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}%
+ \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:title}}
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:name}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:title}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}}}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:shorthandibid}%
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteibid\AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:ibid}}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:reset}}}
+ {\ifthenelse{\ifciteidem\AND\NOT\boolean{cbx:noidem}%
+ \AND\NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}%
+ \booltrue{cbx:idemfull}}
+ {}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:full}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:save}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{footref}{%
+ \csxdef{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}{\the\value{instcount}}%
+ \label{cbx@\the\value{instcount}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:full}{%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}%
+ \usebibmacro{footref}%
+ \printtext[bibhypertarget]{%
+ \usedriver
+ {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+ {}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:title}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\ifentrytype{review}}
+ and
+ not test {\iffieldundef{xref}}
+ }
+ {\booltrue{cbx:review}% für cite:seenote (damit das rezensierte Werk keinen Verweis bekommt)
+ \printtext[review]{\bbx@review{\thefield{xref}}}%
+ \boolfalse{cbx:review}}% \boolfalse ist nötig, damit @review selbst wieder einen Verweis bekommt
+ {\ifsingletitle
+ {\setunit{}}% Löschen des \nametitledelim, falls kein Titel ausgegeben wird
+ {\printtext[bibhyperlink]{%
+ \printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifuseeditor
+ or
+ test \ifusetranslator
+ }
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+ {}
+ {\ifnameundef{editor}
+ {}
+ {\ifboolexpr{
+ bool {xrefidem}
+ and
+ bool {bbx:edbyidem}
+ }
+ {\newunit
+ \bibstring{byeditor}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{cite:byeditor}}}}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:seenote}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:shorthand}{%
+ \printtext[bibhyperlink]{\printfield{shorthand}}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:seenote}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:seenote}{%
+ \ifbool{cbx:review}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:parencitefoot}
+ {\addspace\mkbibbrackets{%
+ \midsentence\bibstring{seenote}\addnbspace%
+ \ref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:pageref}
+ {\ifsamepage{\the\value{instcount}}
+ {\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}
+ {}
+ {\addcomma\space\bibstring{page}\addnbspace%
+ \pageref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}}}
+ {}}}
+ {\addspace\mkbibparens{%
+ \midsentence\bibstring{seenote}\addnbspace%
+ \ref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:pageref}
+ {\ifsamepage{\the\value{instcount}}
+ {\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}
+ {}
+ {\addcomma\space\bibstring{page}\addnbspace%
+ \pageref{cbx@\csuse{cbx@first@\thefield{entrykey}}}}}
+ {}}}}}
+
+%% xref
+\newbibmacro*{cite:xref}{%
+ \ifciteseen
+ {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+ {}
+ {\ifboolexpr{
+ bool {xrefidem}
+ and
+ bool {bbx:edbyidem}
+ }
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:xref:idem}}
+ {\ifbool{xref:inbook}
+ {\usebibmacro{author}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}}%
+ \nametitledelim}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:title}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
+ {\ifboolexpr{
+ bool {xrefidem}
+ and
+ bool {bbx:edbyidem}
+ }
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxrefidem}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:fullxref}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxref}{%
+ \usebibmacro{footref}%
+ \usedriver
+ {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {xref\thefield{entrytype}}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+ {}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:fullxrefidem}{%
+ \usebibmacro{footref}%
+ \usedriver
+ {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {xrefidem\thefield{entrytype}}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citedas}
+ {\addspace\usebibmacro{shorthandintro}}
+ {}}}%
+
+%% falls eine Bibliographie ausgegeben wird,
+%% soll kein '(wie Anm. x)' erscheinen
+\AtBeginBibliography{%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:xref}{%
+ \iffieldundef{shorthand}%
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:editor}%
+ \iffieldundef{shorttitle}%
+ {\printfield{title}}%
+ {\printfield{shorttitle}}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifuseeditor
+ or
+ test \ifusetranslator
+ }
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+ {}
+ {\ifbool{xrefidem}%
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\newunit
+ \bibstring{byeditor}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \bibstring[\mkidem]{idemdat\thefield{gender}}}
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}}
+ {\newunit
+ \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}}}}%
+ {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}}}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkfootnotecite]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}[\mkparencite]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\footcite}[\mkfootnotecite]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\fullcite}[\mkfootnotecite]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}%
+ \booltrue{cbx:fullcite}}
+ {\usedriver
+ {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkfootnotecite]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:full:citepages}%
+ \booltrue{cbx:fullcite}}
+ {\usedriver
+ {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\smartcite}[\iffootnote\mkparencite\mkfootnotecite]
+ {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote}}
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\textcite}[\footnotecheck\cbx@textcite\footcite]
+ {\gdef\cbx@savedkeys{}}
+ {\printnames{labelname}%
+ \ifciteseen
+ {\global\boolfalse{cbx:textcitefull}}
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:textcitefull}}%
+ \xappto\cbx@savedkeys{\thefield{entrykey},}}
+ {\multinamedelim}
+ {\protected@xappto\cbx@savedcites{%
+ [\thefield{prenote}][\thefield{postnote}]{\cbx@savedkeys}}}
+
+\newrobustcmd{\cbx@textcite}[2]{%
+ \def\cbx@savedcites{#1}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:parencitefoot}
+ {#2%
+ \addspace\mkbibparens{\cbx@savedcites}}
+ {#2%
+ \cbx@savedcites}}
+
+\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\cites}[\mkfootnotecite]{\cite}{\multicitedelim}
+\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\parencites}[\mkparencite]{\parencite}{\multicitedelim}
+\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\footcites}[\mkfootnotecite]{\footcite}{\multicitedelim}
+\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\textcites}[\cbx@textcite\footcites]{\textcite}{\textcitesdelim}
+
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+%%%%% Unverändert aus verbose-inote übernommen %%%%%
+%%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%% %%%%%
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:ibid}{%
+ \printtext[bibhyperlink]{\bibstring[\mkibid]{ibidem}}%
+ \ifloccit
+ {\global\booltrue{cbx:loccit}}
+ {}}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/standard-dw.cbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/standard-dw.cbx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..348daefb5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/cbx/standard-dw.cbx
@@ -0,0 +1,473 @@
+% standard-dw.cbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016
+
+\ProvidesFile{standard-dw.cbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex citation style]
+
+\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/11}
+ {}
+ {\PackageError{biblatex-dw}
+ {Outdated 'biblatex' package\MessageBreak
+ Upgrade to biblatex v3.3 (2016/03/11) or later.\MessageBreak
+ I found: '\csuse{ver@biblatex.sty}'.\MessageBreak
+ This is a fatal error. I'm aborting now}%
+ \endinput}
+
+\newbool{cbx:authauthxref}
+\newbool{cbx:authedxref}
+\newbool{cbx:citeauthor}
+\newbool{cbx:citeauthorfoot}
+\newbool{cbx:citeauthornormalfont}
+\newbool{cbx:citeauthornamefirstfull}
+\newbool{cbx:citeauthornamefull}
+\newbool{cbx:citedas}
+\newbool{cbx:edstringincitations}
+\newbool{cbx:fullcite}% Test, ob fullcite ausgeführt wurde (wichtig für @review)
+\newbool{cbx:idemfull}
+\newbool{cbx:noidem}
+\newbool{cbx:omiteditor}
+\newbool{cbx:rpcited}% wurde der parent des @review schon zitiert?
+\newbool{cbx:xrefparent:firstcite}
+\newbool{cbx:shorthandibid}
+\newbool{cbx:loccit}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:citepages}{}
+\newbibmacro*{cite:full:citepages}{}
+\newbibmacro*{cite:postnote}{}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{citedas}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:citedas}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{edstringincitations}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:edstringincitations}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{omiteditor}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:omiteditor}}
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{shorthandibid}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:shorthandibid}}
+
+\DeclareEntryOption{citedas}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:citedas}}
+\DeclareEntryOption{shorthandibid}[true]{%
+ \csuse{bool#1}{cbx:shorthandibid}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{citeauthor}[namefont]{%
+ \ifcsdef{cbx@opt@citeauthor@#1}
+ {\csuse{cbx@opt@citeauthor@#1}}
+ {\blxdw@error{%
+ Invalid option 'citeauthor=#1'\MessageBreak
+ Valid values are 'namefont', 'namefontfoot', 'normalfont'}}}
+\def\cbx@opt@citeauthor@namefont{%
+ \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthornormalfont}%
+ \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthorfoot}}
+\def\cbx@opt@citeauthor@namefontfoot{%
+ \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthornormalfont}%
+ \booltrue{cbx:citeauthorfoot}}
+\def\cbx@opt@citeauthor@normalfont{%
+ \booltrue{cbx:citeauthornormalfont}%
+ \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthorfoot}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{citeauthorname}[normal]{%
+ \ifcsdef{cbx@opt@citeauthorname@#1}
+ {\csuse{cbx@opt@citeauthorname@#1}}
+ {\blxdw@error{%
+ Invalid option 'citeauthorname=#1'\MessageBreak
+ Valid values are 'normal', 'firstfull', 'full'}}}
+\def\cbx@opt@citeauthorname@normal{%
+ \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthornamefull}%
+ \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthornamefirstfull}}
+\def\cbx@opt@citeauthorname@firstfull{%
+ \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthornamefull}%
+ \booltrue{cbx:citeauthornamefirstfull}}
+\def\cbx@opt@citeauthorname@full{%
+ \booltrue{cbx:citeauthornamefull}%
+ \boolfalse{cbx:citeauthornamefirstfull}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{firstfullname}[true]{% aus Kompatibilitätsgründen
+ \blxdw@error{%
+ Option 'firstfullname' is obsolete,\MessageBreak
+ please use option 'citeauthorname' instead}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{ibidpage}[true]{%
+ \ifstrequal{#1}{true}
+ {\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{loccittracker=context}}% Standard: constrict
+ {\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{loccittracker=false}}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{pageref}[true]{%
+ \setbool{cbx:pageref}{#1}}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyOption{citepages}[permit]{%
+ \ifcsdef{cbx@opt@citepages@#1}
+ {\csuse{cbx@opt@citepages@#1}}
+ {\blxdw@error
+ {Invalid option 'citepages=#1'\MessageBreak
+ Valid values are 'permit', 'suppress', 'omit', 'separate'}}}
+
+\def\cbx@opt@citepages@permit{%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:citepages}{}%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:full:citepages}{}%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:postnote}{%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:postnote:ibidpage}}}
+
+\def\cbx@opt@citepages@suppress{%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:citepages}{}%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:full:citepages}{%
+ \clearfield{pages}%
+ \clearfield{pagetotal}}%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:postnote}{%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:postnote:ibidpage}}}
+
+\def\cbx@opt@citepages@omit{%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:citepages}{}%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:full:citepages}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{\value{citetotal}}}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldpages{postnote}}
+ }
+ {\clearfield{pages}%
+ \clearfield{pagetotal}}
+ {}}%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:postnote}{%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:postnote:ibidpage}}}
+
+\def\cbx@opt@citepages@separate{%
+ \providetoggle{cbx:fullcite}%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:citepages}{%
+ \global\togglefalse{cbx:fullcite}}%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:full:citepages}{%
+ \global\toggletrue{cbx:fullcite}}%
+ \renewbibmacro*{cite:postnote}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ togl {cbx:fullcite}
+ and
+ test {\iffieldpages{postnote}}
+ and
+ test {\ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{\value{citetotal}}}
+ and
+ ( not test {\iffieldundef{pages}}
+ or
+ ( not test {\iffieldundef{pagetotal}}
+ and
+ bool {bbx:pagetotal}
+ )
+ )
+ }
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote:pages}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:postnote:ibidpage}}}
+ \providebibmacro*{cite:postnote:pages}{%
+ \setunit{\postnotedelim}%
+ \bibstring{thiscite}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printfield{postnote}}}
+
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+ autocite=footnote,
+ citedas=true,
+ citepages=separate,
+ citetracker=true,
+ edstringincitations=true,
+ ibidtracker=constrict,
+ idemtracker=constrict,
+ opcittracker=false,
+ pagetracker=true,
+ shorthandibid=true
+}
+
+\InitializeCitationStyle{%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:reset}}
+
+\OnManualCitation{%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:reset}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:reset}{%
+ \global\undef\cbx@lasthash%
+ \global\booltrue{cbx:noidem}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:save}{%
+ \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}%
+ \csxdef{cbx:lastcite@\thefield{entrykey}}{\the\value{instcount}}%
+ \global\boolfalse{cbx:noidem}}
+
+% Ausschalten von annotation und library für Zitate im Text
+\AtEveryCite{%
+ \boolfalse{bbx:annotation}%
+ \boolfalse{bbx:library}%
+}
+
+%% Doppelpunkt nach Autoren/Editoren
+%% aus Kompatibilitätsgründen zu früheren Versionen wird
+%% \citenamepunct verwendet
+\newcommand*{\citenamepunct}{\addcolon\space}
+\renewcommand*{\nametitledelim}{\citenamepunct}
+\AtEveryCite{% bei jedem Zitat nametitledelim statt labelnamepunct verwenden
+ \let\labelnamepunct\nametitledelim
+}
+
+%% Slashes zwischen Autoren/Editoren
+\newcommand*{\citerevsdnamedelim}{}
+\newcommand*{\citemultinamedelim}{\slash}
+\newcommand*{\citefinalnamedelim}{\slash}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \let\revsdnamedelim\citerevsdnamedelim
+ \let\multinamedelim\citemultinamedelim
+ \let\finalnamedelim\citefinalnamedelim
+}
+\AtBeginBibliography{% am Anfang des Literaturverzeichnisses umschalten wegen xref
+ \let\citerevsdnamedelim\bibrevsdnamedelim
+ \let\citemultinamedelim\bibmultinamedelim
+ \let\citefinalnamedelim\bibfinalnamedelim
+}
+
+%% Textcite delimiter
+\newcommand*{\textcitesdelim}{\addspace\bibstring{and}\space}
+
+%% Titelformate in Zitaten
+\DeclareFieldFormat*{citetitle}{#1}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:name}{%
+ \printnames{labelname}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:edstringincitations}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:idem}{%
+ \bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:edstringincitations}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:xref:idem}{%
+ \bibstring[\mkidem]{idem\thefield{gender}}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:edstringincitations}%
+ \ifuseeditor
+ {\ifnameundef{editor}
+ {\ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifusetranslator
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{translator}}
+ }
+ {\clearname{translator}}
+ {}}
+ {\clearname{editor}}}
+ {\ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifusetranslator
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{translator}}
+ }
+ {\clearname{translator}}
+ {}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:edstringincitations}{%
+ \ifbool{cbx:edstringincitations}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:editorstrg/translatorstrg}}
+ {}%
+ \setunit{\nametitledelim}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:editorstrg/translatorstrg}{%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifuseeditor\AND\ifnameundef{author}%
+ \AND\NOT\ifnameundef{editor}}
+ {\usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}%
+ \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+ \clearname{editor}}
+ {}%
+ \ifthenelse{\ifusetranslator\AND\ifnameundef{author}%
+ \AND\ifnameundef{editor}%
+ \AND\NOT\ifnameundef{translator}}
+ {\usebibmacro{editorstringpunct}%
+ \usebibmacro{translatorstrg}%
+ \clearname{translator}}
+ {}}
+
+% Option 'citeauthorname'
+\newcommand*{\cbx@seennames}{}
+\newrobustcmd*{\cbx@nameseen}[1]{%
+ \listxadd{\cbx@seennames}{\detokenize{#1}}}
+\newrobustcmd*{\cbx@ifnameseen}[1]{%
+ \xifinlist{\detokenize{#1}}{\cbx@seennames}}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifbool{cbx:citeauthornamefirstfull}
+ {\DeclareNameFormat{citeauthor}{%
+ \nameparts{#1}%
+ \cbx@ifnameseen{\namepartfamily\namepartgiven\namepartprefix\namepartsuffix}
+ {\ifcase\value{uniquename}%
+ \usebibmacro{name:family}{\namepartfamily}{\namepartgiven}{\namepartprefix}{\namepartsuffix}%
+ \or
+ \ifuseprefix
+ {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}{\namepartfamily}{\namepartgiveni}{\namepartprefix}{\namepartsuffixi}}
+ {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}{\namepartfamily}{\namepartgiveni}{\namepartprefixi}{\namepartsuffixi}}%
+ \fi}%
+ {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}{\namepartfamily}{\namepartgiven}{\namepartprefix}{\namepartsuffix}%
+ \cbx@nameseen{\namepartfamily\namepartgiven\namepartprefix\namepartsuffix}}%
+ \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}%
+ \DeclareCiteCommand{\citeauthor}
+ {\booltrue{cbx:citeauthor}%
+ \boolfalse{citetracker}%
+ \boolfalse{pagetracker}%
+ \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\indexnames{labelname}%
+ \printnames[citeauthor]{labelname}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+ {\ifbool{cbx:citeauthornamefull}
+ {\DeclareNameFormat{citeauthor}{%
+ \nameparts{#1}%
+ \ifuseprefix
+ {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}{\namepartfamily}{\namepartgiveni}{\namepartprefix}{\namepartsuffixi}}
+ {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}{\namepartfamily}{\namepartgiven}{\namepartprefix}{\namepartsuffix}}%
+ \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}%
+ \DeclareCiteCommand{\citeauthor}
+ {\booltrue{cbx:citeauthor}%
+ \boolfalse{citetracker}%
+ \boolfalse{pagetracker}%
+ \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\indexnames{labelname}%
+ \printnames[citeauthor]{labelname}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+ {\DeclareCiteCommand{\citeauthor}
+ {\booltrue{cbx:citeauthor}%
+ \boolfalse{citetracker}%
+ \boolfalse{pagetracker}%
+ \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+ {\indexnames{labelname}%
+ \printnames{labelname}}
+ {\multicitedelim}
+ {\usebibmacro{postnote}}}}}
+
+%% Formatierung von 'ibidem' entsprechend der Option 'ibidemfont'
+\providecommand*{\mkibid}[1]{%
+ \bbx@ibidemfont{#1}}
+
+%% pages (wichtig für xref)
+\newbibmacro*{pages}{%
+ \setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
+ \printfield{pages}}
+
+%% in manchen Literaturverweisen (wenn nicht fullcite)
+%% müssen statt der vollen Namen (Format [byeditor])
+%% nur die Nachnamen ausgegeben werden (Format [labelname])
+\newbibmacro*{cite:byeditor}{%
+ \ifnameundef{editor}
+ {\ifnameundef{translator}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{bytypestrg}{translator}{translator}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printnames[labelname]{translator}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{bytypestrg}{editor}{editor}%
+ \setunit{\addspace}%
+ \printnames[labelname]{editor}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:author}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifuseauthor
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{author}}
+ }
+ {\ifbool{xrefidem}
+ {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+ \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}}
+ {\printnames[labelname]{author}}}
+ {\printnames[labelname]{author}%
+ \global\undef\bbx@lasthash}%
+ \clearname{author}}
+ {}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:editor}{%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifuseeditor
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}
+ }
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+ \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}}
+ {\printnames[labelname]{editor}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:edstringincitations}}}
+ {\printnames[labelname]{editor}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:edstringincitations}%
+ \global\undef\bbx@lasthash}%
+ \clearname{editor}}
+ {}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test \ifusetranslator
+ and
+ not test {\ifnameundef{translator}}
+ and
+ ( not test \ifuseeditor
+ or
+ ( test \ifuseeditor
+ and
+ test {\ifnameundef{editor}} ) )
+ }
+ {\ifbool{bbx:edbyidem}
+ {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{namehash}{\bbx@lasthash}\AND
+ \NOT\iffirstonpage}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:idem}}
+ {\printnames[labelname]{translator}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:edstringincitations}}}
+ {\printnames[labelname]{translator}%
+ \usebibmacro{cite:edstringincitations}%
+ \global\undef\bbx@lasthash}%
+ \clearname{translator}}
+ {}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:postnote:ibidpage}{%
+ \ifbool{cbx:loccit}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{postnote}}}
+
+%% Test, ob author und editor bei xref identisch sind
+%% (für xref=true, useeditor=false oder usetranslator=false,
+%% edbyidem=true)
+\newbibmacro*{authedxrefcheck}{%
+ \iffieldundef{xref}
+ {}
+ {\savefield{xref}{\bbx@tempa}%
+ \savefield{xref}{\bbx@tempb}%
+ \entrydata{\bbx@tempa}{%
+ \savename{editor}{\bbx@tempa}}%
+ \entrydata{\bbx@tempb}{%
+ \savename{translator}{\bbx@tempb}}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\ifnameequals{author}{\bbx@tempa}}
+ or
+ test {\ifnameequals{author}{\bbx@tempb}}
+ }
+ {\booltrue{cbx:authedxref}}
+ {\boolfalse{cbx:authedxref}}}}
+
+%% Test, ob author des @inbook und author des @book bei xref
+%% identisch sind (für xref=true, edbyidem=true); nötig,
+%% damit der Herausgeber nicht durch idem ersetzt wird
+%\newbool{cbx:autheddiff}% auther of @inbook and editor of @book differ
+\newbibmacro*{authauthxrefcheck}{%
+ \iffieldundef{xref}
+ {}
+ {\savefield{xref}{\bbx@tempa}%
+ \entrydata{\bbx@tempa}{%
+ \savename{author}{\bbx@tempa}}%
+ \ifboolexpr{
+ test {\ifnameequals{author}{\bbx@tempa}}
+ }
+ {\booltrue{cbx:authauthxref}}
+ {\boolfalse{cbx:authauthxref}}}}
+
+%% für @review
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\bbx@review}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+ \ifentryseen{\bbx@reviewparent}
+ {\booltrue{cbx:rpcited}}
+ {\boolfalse{cbx:rpcited}}%
+ \ifbool{cbx:fullcite}
+ {\usedriver
+ {\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}
+ {\thefield{entrytype}}}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite}}}
+ {}
+ {}
+
+%% xref
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\bbx@xref}
+ {}
+ {\usebibmacro{cite:xref}}
+ {}
+ {}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/lbx/english-dw.lbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/lbx/english-dw.lbx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1f61a78583
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/lbx/english-dw.lbx
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+% english-dw.lbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016
+
+\ProvidesFile{english-dw.lbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex localization file]
+
+\NewBibliographyString{%
+ idemdat,%
+ idemdatsf,%
+ idemdatsm,%
+ idemdatsn,%
+ idemdatpf,%
+ idemdatpm,%
+ idemdatpn,%
+ idemdatpp,%
+ inrefstring,%
+ review}
+
+\InheritBibliographyExtras{english}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyStrings{%
+ inherit = {english},
+ thiscite = {{here}{here}},
+ idemdat = {{eidem}{eidem}},
+ idemdatsm = {{eidem}{eidem}},
+ idemdatsf = {{eidem}{eidem}},
+ idemdatsn = {{eidem}{eidem}},
+ idemdatpm = {{eisdem}{eisdem}},
+ idemdatpf = {{eisdem}{eisdem}},
+ idemdatpn = {{eisdem}{eisdem}},
+ idemdatpp = {{eisdem}{eisdem}},
+ inrefstring = {{article\addspace}{art\adddotspace}},
+ review = {{Review of\addspace}{Review of\addspace}},
+}
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/lbx/german-dw.lbx b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/lbx/german-dw.lbx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..99976350ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex-contrib/biblatex-dw/latex/lbx/german-dw.lbx
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+% german-dw.lbx, Dominik Waßenhoven 2016
+
+\ProvidesFile{german-dw.lbx}[2016/12/06 v1.7 biblatex localization file]
+
+\InheritBibliographyExtras{german}
+
+\NewBibliographyString{%
+ idemdat,%
+ idemdatsf,%
+ idemdatsm,%
+ idemdatsn,%
+ idemdatpf,%
+ idemdatpm,%
+ idemdatpn,%
+ idemdatpp,%
+ inrefstring,%
+ review}
+
+\DeclareBibliographyStrings{%
+ inherit = {german},
+ idem = {{derselbe}{ders\adddot}},
+ idemsm = {{derselbe}{ders\adddot}},
+ idemsf = {{dieselbe}{dies\adddot}},
+ idemsn = {{dasselbe}{dass\adddot}},
+ idempm = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}},
+ idempf = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}},
+ idempn = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}},
+ idempp = {{dieselben}{dies\adddot}},
+ ibidem = {{ebenda}{ebd\adddot}},
+ idemdat = {{demselben}{dems\adddot}},
+ idemdatsm = {{demselben}{dems\adddot}},
+ idemdatsf = {{derselben}{ders\adddot}},
+ idemdatsn = {{demselben}{dems\adddot}},
+ idemdatpm = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}},
+ idemdatpf = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}},
+ idemdatpn = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}},
+ idemdatpp = {{denselben}{dens\adddot}},
+ inrefstring = {{Artikel\addspace}{Art\adddotspace}},
+ seenote = {{wie Anmerkung}{wie Anm\adddot}},
+ review = {{Rezension zu\addspace}{Rez\adddotspace zu\addspace}},
+ reprint = {{Nachdruck}{Ndr\adddot}},
+ reprintof = {{Nachdruck von}{Ndr\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ reprintas = {{Nachdruck unter dem Titel}{Ndr\adddotspace u\adddot\addabthinspace d\adddot\ Titel}},
+ byauthor = {{von}{v\adddot}},
+ byeditor = {{herausgegeben von}{hrsg\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ bycompiler = {{kompiliert von}{komp\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ byredactor = {{bearbeitet von}{bearb\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ byfounder = {{begr\"undet von}{begr\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ bycontinuator = {{fortgef\"urt von}{fortgef\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ bycollaborator = {{unter Mitarbeit von}{unter Mitarb\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ bytranslator = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt von}{\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ bycommentator = {{kommentiert von}{komm\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ byannotator = {{erl\"autert von}{erl\"aut\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ withcommentator = {{mit einem Kommentar von}{komm\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ withannotator = {{mit Erl\"auterungen von}{erl\"aut\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ withintroduction = {{mit einer Einleitung von}{eingel\adddot\addabthinspace v\adddot}},
+ withforeword = {{mit einem Vorwort von}{mit einem Vorw\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ withafterword = {{mit einem Nachwort von}{mit einem Nachw\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortr = {{herausgegeben und \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt von}%
+ {hrsg\adddotspace und \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditorco = {{herausgegeben und kommentiert von}%
+ {hrsg\adddotspace und komm\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditoran = {{herausgegeben und erl\"autert von}%
+ {hrsg\adddotspace und erl\"aut\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditorin = {{herausgegeben und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {hrsg\adddotspace und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditorfo = {{herausgegeben und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg\adddotspace und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditoraf = {{herausgegeben und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg\adddotspace und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortrco = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und kommentiert von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und komm\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortran = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und erl\"autert von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und erl\"aut\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortrin = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortrfo = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortraf = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditorcoin = {{herausgegeben, kommentiert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., komm\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditorcofo = {{herausgegeben, kommentiert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditorcoaf = {{herausgegeben, kommentiert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditoranin = {{herausgegeben, erl\"autert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditoranfo = {{herausgegeben, erl\"autert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditoranaf = {{herausgegeben, erl\"autert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortrcoin = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortrcofo = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortrcoaf = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortranin = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortranfo = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ byeditortranaf = {{herausgegeben, \lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {hrsg., \lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatorco = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und kommentiert von}%
+ {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und komm\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatoran = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und erl\"autert von}%
+ {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und erl\"aut\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatorin = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatorfo = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatoraf = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatorcoin = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatorcofo = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatorcoaf = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, kommentiert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., komm\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatoranin = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einer Einleitung versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einer Einl\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatoranfo = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Vorwort versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Vorw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+ bytranslatoranaf = {{\lbx@lfromlang \"ubersetzt, erl\"autert und mit einem Nachwort versehen von}%
+ {\lbx@sfromlang \"ubers., erl\"aut\adddot\ und mit einem Nachw\adddot\ vers\adddot\ v\adddot}},
+}
+\endinput